JP2019103544A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine with an improved presentation effect.SOLUTION: When a super ready-to-win A is to occur, as shown at (C), a character 31AK001, which is a friendly character, is displayed in an image display device 5 and a ready-to-win presentation is started. When a prescribed time is elapsed from a start of the ready-to-win presentation, such as a termination of an introduction portion of the ready-to-win presentation, a title 31AK002 of the super ready-to-win A is displayed across the whole screen of the image display device 5 as shown at (D), and from a speaker 8, a sound corresponding to the title name of the ready-to-win is outputted. Thereby, the title of the super ready-to-win A is notified.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 9

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

  There has been proposed a gaming machine which displays a title for notifying the type of reach effect at the start of reach effect (for example, see Patent Document 1).

JP, 2016-101428, A

  In the gaming machine as described in Patent Document 1, it is desired to enhance the rendering effect.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine with enhanced rendering effects.

(1) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention is:
A gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player,
Suggestion effect execution means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing suggestion effect (for example, reach effect) suggesting control to the advantageous state;
And title notification means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) capable of informing a title corresponding to the suggested effect;
The title notification means can notify a title corresponding to the suggested effect when a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the suggested effect (for example, FIGS. 9D and 9F).
According to such a configuration, the rendering effect can be enhanced.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1),
The suggestion effect executing means can execute a plurality of types of the indication effects,
In a plurality of types of the suggested effects, at least a part of the effects within the predetermined period may be executable in a common manner (for example, FIG. 9C).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to focus attention on which suggestion effect is performed, and the interest is improved.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above,
At a plurality of execution timings during the suggestion effect execution, it is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, a development effect or an advance notice effect) indicating that the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The execution timing of the specific effect may not be provided during the predetermined period.
According to such a configuration, the player's sense of expectation can be maintained even after the notification of the title.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above,
The suggestion effect executing means executes at least a first indication effect (for example, reach effect of super reach A or super reach B) and a second indication effect (for example, reach effect of super reach D or super reach E) as the indication effect. Is possible,
The title notification means may notify a title corresponding to the second suggestion effect from the start of the second suggestion effect in the second suggestion effect.
According to such a configuration, since the notification of the title according to the suggested effect can be performed, the effect of the effect is improved.

(5) In the gaming machine of (4) above,
The rate at which the advantageous state is controlled may be higher when the first suggested effect is executed than when the second suggested effect is executed.
According to such a configuration, the rendering effect is improved.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above,
The suggestion effect performing means may be capable of executing the suggestion effect in an effect mode associated with a title notified in the predetermined period.
According to such a configuration, the rendering effect is improved.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above,
Detection means capable of detecting the action of the player (for example, stick controller 31A or push button 31B);
A specific display execution unit (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) for performing specific display (for example, small button image 31AK043, large button image 31AK047, stick image 31AK051) corresponding to the detection unit;
The specific display execution means is
As the specific display, a first specific display (for example, small button image 31AK043) and a second specific display (for example, large button image 31AK047, stick image 31AK051) having a higher degree of advantage for the player than the first specific display are displayed. Is possible,
After the first specific display is displayed in the ineffective period of detection by the detection means, the first specific display is changed to the second specific display (for example, FIG. 17 (E), FIG. 18 (I));
In the effective period of detection by the detection means, an operation effect using the changed second specific display may be performed (for example, FIGS. 18 (J) and (K)).
According to such a configuration, the rendering effect is improved.

(8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (7) above,
The first suggested display whose display size is the first size (the display by the shutter image 31AK061 of the first size displayed at the time of the shutter effect shown in FIG. 19A) as the suggested display that suggests the expectation of the control to the advantageous state Etc.) and display means (for example, an image capable of displaying the second suggested display (the reach title image 31AK062 etc. of the second size displayed at the time of reach title effect shown in FIG. 19D) whose display size is the second size) The display device 5 further includes a CPU 120 for effect control,
The display means is
19A and 19D (element E1 (banana), element E2 (melon), element E3 (apple), element E4 (watermelon), element E5 (strawberry), etc.) shown in FIGS. 19A and 19D) Specific images (such as the fruit pattern shown in FIGS. 19 (a) and 19 (d)) configured to include
Even when any of the first suggestion display and the second suggestion display is displayed in a pattern including the specific image, a plurality of types of elements are included in both the first suggestion display and the second suggestion display. The display may be performed (such as displaying so as to include the elements E1 to E5 in any of the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIGS. 19A and 19D).
According to such a configuration, the specific image can be suitably displayed regardless of the display size of the suggestion display. This makes it possible to accurately convey that a specific image has been displayed.

It is a front view of a pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special symbol process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a figure for demonstrating the kind of fluctuation pattern and reach. It is a figure showing an example of production operation. It is a figure showing an example of production operation. It is a figure showing an example of production operation. It is a figure showing an example of production operation. It is a figure showing an example of production operation. It is a figure showing an example of production operation. It is a flow chart which shows an example of advance production determination processing. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio in a preliminary production determination process. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation operation of a modification. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation operation of a modification. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation operation of a modification. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a rear perspective view of a pachinko game machine. It is a rear perspective view of a pachinko game machine in a state where a gaming machine frame is opened. It is explanatory drawing which shows a display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a big hit classification determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a loss fluctuation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a non reach loss fluctuation pattern determination table. 51 is a flowchart showing game control main processing in the characteristic part 121IW. 51 is a flowchart showing game control main processing in the characteristic part 121IW. It is a flowchart which shows a setting confirmation process and a setting change process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the process performed at the time of power activation. It is an explanatory view showing a display mode of a display monitor in setting change processing. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows a part of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows the example of command analysis processing. It is a flow chart which shows the example of command analysis processing. It is a flow chart which shows the example of command analysis processing. It is an explanatory view showing an initial outcome determination table. It is a flowchart which shows pre-reading advance notice setting processing. It is an explanatory view showing a concrete example of a pre-reading zone production decision table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a variable display start waiting process. It is an explanatory view showing a pre-game suggestion effect determination table. It is a flowchart which shows a variable display start setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a super reach kind determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of an icon pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of an icon pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a pre-reading zone production pattern determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the suggestion production | presentation determination process in a game. FIG. 16 is an explanatory view showing a during-game suggestion effect determination table. It is a flow chart which shows production processing under variable display. It is a flow chart which shows production processing under variable display. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big hit inside production determination processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows a big hit inside suggestion production determination table, a character item production determination table, and a light-guide plate presentation determination table. It is a figure showing an example of production operation. It is a figure showing an example of production operation. It is a flowchart which shows small hitting end production processing (step S175). It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a presentation stage determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the production | presentation aspect in the case of changing a production | presentation stage after completion | finish of a small hit game. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the production | presentation aspect in the case of changing a production | presentation stage after completion | finish of a small hit game. It is an explanatory view for explaining an effect mode of pre-reading zone effect. It is an explanatory view for explaining an effect mode of pre-reading zone effect. The production mode of the suggested production during reach will be described. The production mode of the suggested production during reach will be described. It is a figure which shows the security cover in modification 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows opening and closing of the game machine frame in the modification 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the security cover in the modification 2. FIG. FIG. 18 is a view showing opening and closing of the gaming machine frame in the modification 2; It is an explanatory view showing a pachinko game machine in modification 3. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern setting process according to a modification 4; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing variable display start setting processing in a modification 4; FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the small hit after suggestion production determination table.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which is also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration etc. of pachinko gaming machine 1)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, showing the layout of the main members. The pachinko gaming machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2. In this game area, a game ball as a game medium is shot and shot from a predetermined ball striking device.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area), variable display (also referred to as a special figure game) of special symbols (also called special figures) as plural types of special identification information A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

  In addition, "variable display" of a special symbol is, for example, variably displaying a plurality of types of special symbols (the same applies to other symbols described later). The variation includes update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, and enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols. In the special symbol and the variation of the ordinary symbol described later, a plurality of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbol described later, a plurality of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. In addition, the aspect which blink-displays a certain symbol is also contained in a fluctuation | variation. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is displayed as a stop as a display result (also referred to as derivation or derivation display, etc.) (the same applies to variable display of other symbols described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or fluctuation.

  The special symbol variably displayed in the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as "first special view", and the special symbol variably displayed in the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as "second special view". Also, a special drawing game using the first special drawing is referred to as "first special drawing game", and a special drawing game using the second special drawing is also referred to as "second special drawing game". In addition, one type of special symbol display device for performing variable display of special symbols may be used.

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 includes, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may be configured of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

  For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol (such as a symbol indicating a numeral or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbol in synchronization with the first special drawing game or the second special drawing game. Variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special view game or the second special view game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, upper and lower) in each of the “left”, “middle” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. Scroll display of direction and update display). Note that the special view game to be executed synchronously and the variable display of the decorative symbol are collectively referred to simply as variable display.

  On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area may be provided for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display for which execution is suspended, or an active display corresponding to the variable display under execution. The hold display and the active display are also collectively referred to as a variable display corresponding display corresponding to the variable display.

  The number of pending variable displays is also referred to as the number of pending storages. The number of pending storages corresponding to the first special view game is also referred to as a first pending storage number, and the number of pending storages corresponding to the second special view game is also referred to as a second pending storage number. The total of the first pending storage number and the second pending storage number is also referred to as the total pending storage number.

  In addition, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided at predetermined positions of the game board 2, and the first hold indicator 25A includes the number of lighted LEDs. Thus, the first number of pending storages is displayed, and the second pending display 25B displays the second number of pending storages according to the number of lighted LEDs.

  Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

  The winning ball device 6A forms, for example, a first start winning opening which is always kept in a predetermined open state where a gaming ball can enter, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first starting winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out and a first special view game can be started.

  The variable winning ball device 6B (normally driven combination) forms a second start winning opening which is changed to a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip type part having a pair of movable wing pieces, and when the movable wing piece is in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is in an off state, the tip of the movable wing pieces Is close to the winning ball device 6A, and the gaming ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (the second starting winning opening is closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state where the gaming ball can enter the second start winning opening by the movable wing piece being in the tilting position when the solenoid 81 is in the on state (second start It is also said that the winning opening will be open.). When a game ball enters the second starting winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out and a second special view game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that changes between the closed state and the open state, and is not limited to the one provided with the electrically operated tulip type part.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four places on the left and right lower sides of the game area), a general winning opening 10 which is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member is provided. In this case, when the player enters any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

  Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a big winning opening is provided. The special variable winning prize ball device 7 has a special winning opening door driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and the special winning opening as a specific area changes into an open state and a closed state by the special winning opening door. Form.

  As an example, in the special variable winning prize ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning mouth door (for special electric combination) is in the OFF state, the big winning mouth door closes the big winning mouth, and the gaming ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning prize ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning mouth door is in the on state, the big winning mouth door opens the big winning mouth, and the game ball easily enters the big winning mouth Become.

  When the game ball enters the special winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as winning balls. When the game ball enters the big winning opening, for example, more winning balls are paid out than when the game ball enters the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10.

  It is also called "winning" that the game ball enters each winning opening including the general winning opening 10. In particular, winning of the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

  An ordinary symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the left side of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of 7 segments of LEDs and the like, and performs variable display of a normal symbol as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from the special symbol. The ordinary symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such variable display of ordinary symbols is also referred to as a common game.

  On the left side of the image display device 5, a passage gate 41 through which the game ball can pass is provided. Based on the passage of the game ball through the passage gate 41, the common-play game is executed.

  Above the normal symbol display 20, a general drawing reserve display 25C is provided. The common drawing suspension display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of common drawing reservation storages, which is the number of common drawing games whose execution is being held, by the number of lighted LEDs.

  On the surface of the game board 2, besides the above-described configuration, a windmill and a large number of obstacle nails for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball are provided. At the lowermost position of the game area, an out port is provided where game balls that have not entered any winning port are captured.

  At the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided, and further, a gaming effect lamp 9 for gaming effects is provided in the periphery of the gaming area ing. The game effect lamp 9 is configured to include an LED.

  At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 is provided which operates according to the effect.

  At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a striking operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided which is operated by a player or the like to fire the gaming ball toward the gaming area by the striking device.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball and a game ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine are held so as to be able to be supplied to the ball striking device (stored ) Is provided to provide a hitting ball supply plate (upper plate). Below the upper plate, there is provided a hitting plate (lower plate) from which winning balls are dispensed when the upper plate is full.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a stick controller 31A which can be held and tilted by the player is attached. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B is provided, which allows a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's operation (operation etc.), but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
The game ball is fired toward the game area by the player's rotation operation on the ball striking operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. When the gaming ball passes through the passing gate 41, a regular drawing game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, when a game ball passes passage gate 41 during a period during execution of the last game of a game (when a game ball passes passage gate 41, but a game game based on the passage can not be executed immediately) The regular game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

  In this common-play game, when a specific normal symbol (per-flat symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol is "per common-word". On the other hand, if an ordinary symbol other than the symbol per common drawing (general drawing loss symbol) is stopped and displayed as the determined normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "general drawing lost". When it becomes "per common plan", opening control is performed to open the variable winning prize ball device 6B for a predetermined period (the second start winning opening is opened).

  When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

  When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, a second special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

  In addition, when the game ball enters into the start winning opening (winning) during the period during execution of the special figure game, and the period controlled to the big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state to be described later (start winning is generated When the special figure game based on the starting winning combination can not be executed immediately), the special figure game based on the entry is suspended from being executed up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

  If special symbols (big hit symbols such as "7", the actual symbols differ according to the big hit type described later) are displayed as special symbols in the special figure game, they will be "big hits" and they will be big hit symbols If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, "2") different from that is displayed stopped, it becomes "small hit". Also, if a special symbol different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol (a lost symbol, for example, "-") is stopped and displayed, it is a "loss".

  After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit gaming state as an advantageous advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special view game becomes "small hit", the small hit gaming state is controlled.

  In the big hit game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. In the open state, of an elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and a timing until the number of gaming balls entering the large winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, nine). It will continue until the earlier timing. The predetermined period is an upper limit period in which the special winning opening can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as an open upper limit period. A cycle in which the special winning opening is thus opened is called a round (round game). In the jackpot gaming state, it is possible to execute repeatedly until the round reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 times or 2 times).

  In the jackpot gaming state, the player can obtain a winning ball by advancing the gaming ball into the big winning opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state, and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

  In the "big hit", a big hit type is set. For example, a large winning opening opening mode (round number and opening upper limit period), a gaming state after the big hit gaming state (described later, normal state, time saving state, probability variation state, etc.) prepared a plurality of types, according to these The type is set. As the jackpot type, there may be provided a jackpot type capable of obtaining many prize balls, or a jackpot type with few prize balls or hardly capable of obtaining prize balls.

  In the small hit gaming state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small hit gaming state, the opening mode similar to the big hit gaming state at the time of some big hit classifications (the number of opening of the big winning opening is the same as the number of rounds, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same Etc.) the big winning opening is open. As in the case of the big hit type, the "small hit" may be provided with a small hit type.

  After the big hit gaming state ends, depending on the big hit type, it may be controlled to the time saving state or the probability changing state.

  In the short time state, control (time reduction control) is executed to shorten the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure changes) compared to the normal state. In the time saving state, by shortening the average spread map fluctuation time (period for changing the spread map) than in the normal state, or by improving the probability of being “per spread map” in the spread game game, than in the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that facilitates the game ball to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. Since the time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol (in particular, the second special symbol) is improved, it is an advantageous state for the player.

  In the probability variation state (probability variation state), in addition to the time saving control, probability variation control is performed in which the probability that the display result is a "big hit" is higher than that in the normal state. The probability change state is a state more advantageous to the player because the probability change state of the special symbol is likely to be a "big hit" in addition to the improvement of the variation efficiency of the special symbol.

  The time saving state or the probability changing state continues until any one end condition such as the fact that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit gaming state is established first. It is also referred to as “the number of times cut (short in the number of times, short in the number of times definite change, etc.)” as the end condition that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is the end condition.

  The normal state is a gaming state other than the special state such as an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state which is advantageous for the player, a short time state, a definite change state, etc., and the display result in the common drawing game is "per common drawing". The pachinko gaming machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special view game will be a "big hit" is a preset state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, as in the case of system reset) It is a state controlled in the same way as when the processing was not performed.

  A state in which the probability change control is being performed is also referred to as a high probability state, and a state in which the probability variation control is not performed is also referred to as a low probability state. A state in which time saving control is being performed is also referred to as a high base state, and a state in which time saving control is not performed is also referred to as a low base state. In combination, the short time state is also referred to as a low probability high base state, the positive variation state is also referred to as a high probability high base state, and the normal state is a low probability low base state. The high certainty state and the low base state are also referred to as the high certainty base state.

  After the small hit gaming state ends, the change of the gaming state is not performed, and the control result of the special drawing game is continuously controlled to the previous gaming state to become the "small hit" (but the "small hit" occurs) When the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above-mentioned number cut, the game state is naturally changed). In addition, it is not necessary to have a "small hit" as a display result of the special drawing game.

  The gaming state may change based on the fact that the gaming ball has passed a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit gaming state. For example, when the gaming ball passes the specific area, it may be controlled to be in the positive changing state after the big hit gaming state.

(Progress of progress etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of informing the progress of the game or boosting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The said effect is demonstrated below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display 5, but in addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or the game effect lamp 9 The operation may be performed by the operation of the movable body 32, etc.

  In the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or (2) In response to the start of the special figure game, variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special drawing game and the second special drawing game, the finalized decorative symbol (a combination of three decorative symbols) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol ) Is also displayed (derived).

  In a period from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the end thereof, the aspect of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be a predetermined reach aspect (reach is established). Here, with the reach mode, when the decorative symbol stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later, variable display is performed for the decorative symbol not yet stopped and displayed. Is the aspect that is continuing.

  In addition, reach production is executed corresponding to becoming the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative design. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a ratio (also called a big hit reliability or a big hit expectation) in which the display result (display result of the special drawing game or display of the variable display of the decorative symbol) becomes “big hit” according to the presentation mode. A plurality of different types of reach effects are performed. The reach production includes, for example, a normal reach and a super reach having a higher hit reliability than the normal reach.

  When the display result of the special view game is "big hit", a finalized decoration pattern to be a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern on the screen of the image display device 5 The display result of the variable display of the symbol becomes "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbol (for example, "7" etc.) is displayed on stop on the predetermined effective line in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of "left", "middle", "right". .

  If it is a "probable big hit" controlled to a definite change state after the end of the big hit gaming state, odd decorative symbols (for example, "7" etc.) are aligned and stop displayed, and after the end of the big hit gaming state In the case of "non-probable variation big hit (usually big hit)" which is not controlled, even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6" etc.) may be arranged to be stopped and displayed. In this case, an odd decorative pattern is also referred to as a probability variation pattern, and an even number decorative pattern is also referred to as a non-probability variation symbol (normal pattern). After reaching the reach mode with a non-deterministic symbol, a promotion effect that finally becomes a "possibly large hit" may be executed.

  When the display result of the special view game is "small hit", a finalized combination symbol (for example, "a small hit combination defined in advance as a display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5). 1 3 5 "etc.) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes" small hit "). As an example, the decorative symbols forming the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of big hit gaming state of the same aspect as small hit gaming state) and when it becomes "small hit" , A fixed finalized design may be derived and displayed.

  When the display result of the special view game is "loss", the display mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol does not become the reach mode, but the fixed decorative symbol of the non-reach combination is displayed as the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (" Sometimes it is stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach loss"). Also, when the display result is "loss", a predetermined reach combination which is not a big hit combination ("reach loss") as a display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol after the variable display of the decorative symbol becomes the reach aspect. There is also a case where the finalized decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes “reach loss”).

  The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, an advance notice effect or the like for giving notice of the jackpot reliability is executed while the decorative symbol is variably displayed. The advance notice effects include advance notice effects for giving notice of the jackpot reliability in the variable display in execution, and pre-reading notice effects for giving notice of the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display for which execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the normal mode may be performed.

  Further, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol temporarily while the decorative symbol is being variably displayed, the variable display is resumed to make one variable display appear as if it were a plurality of variable displays in a pseudo manner. The pseudo series effect may be performed.

  During the jackpot gaming state, a jackpot during the jackpot to notify the jackpot gaming state is executed. As the jackpot effect, an effect of informing the number of rounds or a promotion effect indicating that the value of the jackpot gaming state is improved may be executed. In addition, during the small hitting game state, during the small hitting during the small hitting game state which is notified the small hitting game state is executed. In addition, during the small hit gaming state, and some of the big hit type (big hit type of the big hit gaming state of the same manner as the small hit gaming state, for example, a big hit type that makes the subsequent gaming state highly probable) Depending on the state, the player may not know whether the present is in the small hit gaming state or the big hit gaming state by executing a common effect. In such a case, by performing a common effect after the end of the small hit gaming state and after the end of the big hit gaming state, it is not possible to distinguish whether it is a high probability state or a low probability state. May be

  Further, for example, when the special drawing game or the like is not executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, a main board 11, a presentation control board 12, a voice control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15 and the like as shown in FIG. 2 are mounted. In addition, on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1, various substrates such as a payout control substrate, an information terminal substrate, a launch control substrate, a power supply substrate and the like are arranged.

  The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of suspension), execution of a common drawing game (including management of suspension), big hit It has a function to control gaming state, small hit gaming state, gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main substrate 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and has a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104, and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105.

  The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the function of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effects control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when performing various determinations described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as a main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which stored contents are stored for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is partially or entirely stopped. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded on the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

  The random number circuit 104 is capable of updating numerical data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The gaming random numbers may be updated (updated by software) as the CPU 103 executes a predetermined computer program.

  The I / O 105 includes, for example, input ports to which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display 20, and first hold. An output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the common view hold display 25C and the like, and a solenoid drive signal) is configured.

  The switch circuit 110 detects detection signals (game balls pass) from various switches (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23) for detecting game balls. A detection signal or the like indicating that the switch has been turned on is entered and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, it is detected that the game ball has passed or entered.

  The solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the ordinary motorized role and the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door. Transmit

  The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control), as part of the control of the progress of the game, according to the progress of the game effect control command (command to specify (notice) the progress of the game etc.) effect control board Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main substrate 11 is relayed by the relay substrate 15 and supplied to the effect control substrate 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main substrate 11 (for example, display results of special drawing games (including a big hit type), fluctuation patterns used when executing the special drawing games (described in detail later) ), Game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big winning opening, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, gaming state), command for designating occurrence of error and the like are included.

  The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and effects (various effects corresponding to the progress of the game based on the effect control command received, It has a function of performing various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, notification of power failure recovery, and the like.

  On the effect control board 12, a CPU 120 for effect control, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125 are mounted.

  The effect control CPU 120 executes the program stored in the ROM 121 to execute the effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the functions of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed) (Including the determination of At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 is used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

  The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of effects based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (signals output when detecting an operation by the player and appropriately indicating the contents of the operation). The control unit 123 may also be instructed.

  The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes rendering based on a rendering execution instruction from the rendering control CPU 120.

  The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display the effect image by supplying the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the execution instruction of the effect from the effect control CPU 120. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for specifying a sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to perform sound output synchronized with the display of the effect image and to turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. And the lamp control board 14 is supplied with a lamp signal (a signal for specifying the lamp on / off mode). Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

  The voice control board 13 has various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

  The lamp control board 14 has various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9 and drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode specified by the lamp signal. Do. Thus, the display control unit 123 controls voice output and lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

  The effect control CPU 120 executes an audio output, control of lighting / extinguishing of the lamp (supply of a sound designation signal or a lamp signal, etc.), control of the movable body 32 (supply of a signal for operating the movable body 32, etc.) You may do so.

  The random number circuit 124 can count value data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used to execute various effects so as to be updateable. The effect random number may be updated (updated by software) as the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

  The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 transmits, for example, an input port for capturing the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 or the like, and various signals (image signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). And an output port of

  Substrates other than the main substrate 11, such as the effect control substrate 12, the voice control substrate 13, and the lamp control substrate 14, are also referred to as sub substrates. As in the pachinko gaming machine 1, a plurality of sub substrates may be provided for each function, or one sub substrate may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(Operation)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operation of the main substrate 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the gaming control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes gaming control main processing. FIG. 3 is a flow chart showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 in the main board 11.

  In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, first, the CPU 103 sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initialization is performed (step S2). The initial setting includes setting of a stack pointer, setting of a register of a built-in device (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output port or the like), setting to make the RAM 102 accessible.

  Next, it is determined whether the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on, for example, a power supply substrate. When the power is turned on with the clear switch on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 through the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), the initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flag, counter, and buffer stored in the RAM 102, and sets an initial value in the work area.

  Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When receiving the effect control command, the effect control CPU 120 performs, for example, on the image display device 5, screen display for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

  If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before it becomes inoperable due to the stop of the power supply. In the power supply stop process, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes the process of adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data (including various flags, various timer states, and the like) for progressing the game, as well as the state of the backup flag and an error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

  When backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (performed using an error detection code), and determines whether the data is normal (step S4) S5). In step S5, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data at the time of the power supply stop, for example, by the parity bit or the checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

  If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (Step S5; No), the internal state can not be returned to the state at the time of stopping the power supply, so the initialization process (Step S8) is executed.

  If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs recovery processing (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main substrate 11 to the state at the time of stopping the power supply. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the storage content of the RAM 102 (content of backed up data). As a result, when the power supply is stopped, the gaming state is restored, and when the special symbol is changing, the variation of the special symbol is resumed from the state before the recovery by execution of the timer interrupt processing for game control described later. It will be

  Then, the CPU 103 transmits, to the effect control board 12, an effect control command instructing recovery from power failure (step S 7). At the same time, the effect control command for specifying the gaming state before power interruption that has been backed up, or the effect control for specifying the display result of the special figure game in progress when the special figure game is being executed A command may be sent. These commands can use the same commands as those set for transmission in the special symbol process processing described later. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command specifying the time of recovery from the power failure, for example, in the image display device 5, it notifies that the recovery from the power failure has been made or that the recovery from the power failure is in progress. Display the screen to The effect control CPU 120 may perform appropriate screen display based on the effect control command.

  After completing the recovery process or the initialization process and transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the setting of the register of the CTC incorporated in the game control microcomputer 100 is performed so that the timer interrupt is periodically performed every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and the interrupt is permitted (step S12). ). Then it enters loop processing. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

  When the CPU 103 that has executed such a game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives an interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes a game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 4. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, whereby the gate switch 21, the first starting opening switch 22A, and the second starting opening are performed via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not detection signals from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 have been received (step S21). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main side error processing, abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). Thereafter, by executing predetermined information output processing, for example, big hit information (information indicating the number of occurrences of big hit, etc.) supplied to a hole management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1, start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of winnings and the like, and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times and the like of the probability variation state) are output (step S23).

  Following the information output process, the game random number updating process for updating at least a part of the gaming random numbers used on the main substrate 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S25). The CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process for each timer interrupt to realize management of execution and suspension of the special figure game, control of the big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state, control of the playing state, etc. Later).

  Following the special symbol process process, a normal symbol process process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process process every timer interrupt, and based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passage of the game ball to the pass gate 41) management of execution and suspension of the common figure game, It enables the release control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per game". The ordinary game is executed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the general drawing reserve display is displayed by turning on the ordinary drawing suspension display 25C.

  After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when a power failure occurs, processing for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set transmission of an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

  FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In the special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

  In the start winning determination process, processing for detecting the occurrence of the start winning, storing pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the pending storage number is executed. When a start winning occurs, a display result (including a big hit type) and a random value for determining a fluctuation pattern are extracted and stored as hold information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, processing may be executed to determine whether the display result or the variation pattern is read ahead. After storing the hold information and the number of held memories, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the determination result such as the occurrence of start winnings, the number of held memories, and the pre-reading judgment is performed on the effect control board 12 . For example, after the special symbol process process is completed, the effect control command at the start winning combination set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. Is transmitted to

  After executing the start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special view process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each processing (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process processing, transmission setting for transmitting a rendering control command corresponding to each processing to the rendering control board 12 is performed.

  The special symbol normal processing of step S110 is executed when the value of the special drawing process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether to start the first special view game or the second special view game based on the presence / absence of the hold information and the like. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for display result determination, whether the display result of the special symbol or the decorative pattern is "big hit" or "small hit" or "big hit" in the case of "big hit" Are determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal processing, a determined special symbol (one of a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, and a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special figure game is set according to the determined display result. Thereafter, the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. In addition, the special view game using the second special view may be executed with priority over the special view game using the first special view (also referred to as special view 2 priority digest). In addition, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the start condition of the special drawing game may be established in the winning order (also referred to as winning order termination).

  When various determinations are made based on random number values, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which determination values to be compared with random value are assigned to determination results) are referred to. The same applies to other determinations on the main substrate 11 and various determinations on the effect control substrate 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

  The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special drawing process flag is "1". In this variation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of types of variation patterns is used using random value for variation pattern determination based on the result of prior determination of whether or not the display result is "big hit" or "small hit" or the like. The process of deciding on etc. is included. In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when the fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to “2”, and the fluctuation pattern setting process is ended.

  The variation pattern is the execution time of the special figure game (special figure variation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol (such as presence or absence of reach), and the variable display of the decorative symbol The content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.) is designated, and is also called a variable display pattern.

  The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special drawing process flag is "2". In this special symbol variation process, a process to make settings for varying the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, and an elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol Processing etc. is included. Further, it is also determined whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol reaches the special figure variation time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process is ended.

  The special symbol stopping process of step S113 is executed when the value of the special drawing process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the variation of the special symbol is stopped by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, and the finalized special symbol to be the display result of the special symbol is stop displayed (derived) The process for setting up is included. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special processing process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special process process flag is updated to "8". In addition, when the display result is “loss”, the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to “0”. When the display result is "small hit" or "missing", the game state is also updated when the time cut is completed and control is made in the time saving state or the positive change state. When the value of the special drawing process flag is updated, the special symbol stop process ends.

  The big hit opening pre-processing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is "4". This big hit opening pre-processing includes, for example, a process to start the execution of the round in the big hit gaming state and set the big winning opening to the open state based on the display result becoming "big hit" etc. It is done. When the special winning opening is opened, processing for supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is executed. At this time, an open upper limit period for setting the big winning opening in an open state, and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set, for example, in accordance with which jackpot type is. When these settings are completed, the value of the special processing process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening pre-processing ends.

  The big hit open processing of step S115 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is “5”. The big hit opening process is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning opening, the elapsed time measured, the number of gaming balls detected by the count switch 23, etc. It includes a process of determining whether it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the special winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing such as stopping supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door, the value of the special processing process flag is updated to "6", End the process during the big hit open.

  The big hit opening post process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is "6". In this big hit opening post-processing, processing to determine whether the number of executions of the round with the big winning opening opened has reached the set upper limit number of times, or when the upper limit number of times reached the big hit gaming state Includes the process of setting for terminating the program. When the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of rounds has reached the upper limit number of executions, The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special drawing process flag is updated, the big hit release post-processing ends.

  The big hit end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is "7". In this big hit end processing, processing to wait until waiting time corresponding to a period during which ending effect is executed as a rendering operation to notify the end of big hit gaming state, processing corresponding to the end of big hit gaming state It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and short time control. When such setting is performed, the value of the special processing process flag is updated to “0”, and the big hit end processing ends.

  The small hit opening pre-processing of step S118 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is "8". The small hit opening pre-processing includes, for example, a process for setting the large winning opening in the small hit gaming state based on the display result being "small hit". At this time, the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to “9”, and the small hit open pre-processing ends.

  The small hit open processing in step S119 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is "9". In this small hit opening process, it is the timing to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closing state based on the process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning opening and the measured elapsed time, etc. Processing for determining whether or not it is included is included. When the large winning opening is returned to the closed state and the small hit gaming state end timing comes, the value of the special processing process flag is updated to "10", and the small hit open processing is ended.

  The small hitting end process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special process process flag is "10". The small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit gaming state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit gaming state has elapsed, the value of the special processing process flag is updated to "0", and the small hit end processing is ended.

(Main operation of presentation control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the supply of the power supply voltage is received from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122 and set various initial values, and to the effect control board 12 Performs register settings etc. of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Also, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing an initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for performing predetermined operation confirmation is executed.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state each time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the register setting of CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly performed and the process waits.

  Further, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt generated each time a predetermined time has elapsed. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 11 is turned on. If an interrupt occurs because the effect control INT signal is turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt disable state, but interrupts using the CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state. It is desirable to issue a prohibited instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, the effect control command is fetched from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command fetched at this time is stored, for example, in a effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

  If the timer interrupt flag is on at step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main substrate 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are read out. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the effect control command read out is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or the RAM 122 so that the effect control command can be confirmed and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process or the like. Turn on the provided reception flag. In addition, when the effect control command specifies the gaming state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the gaming state.

  After the command analysis process is performed in step S75, an effect control process process is performed (step S76). In the effect control process, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation in the decoration light such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED, the movable body 32 Control to operate various rendering devices is performed, such as driving operation. Further, with regard to the control content of the rendering operation using various rendering devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the rendering control command or the like transmitted from the main substrate 11.

  Following the effect control process of step S76, an effect random number updating process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by software. Thereafter, the process returns to the process of step S73. Before returning to the process of step S73, another process may be performed.

  FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes preread advance notice setting processing (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, based on the presentation control command at the start winning combination transmitted from the main substrate 11, determination, determination, setting, and the like for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed. Moreover, the process for displaying a pending | holding display is performed based on the pending | holding memory number specified from the said production control command.

  After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

  The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of the decorative symbol in the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying start of variable display has been received from the main substrate 11 or the like. And so on. If it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is to be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

  The variable display start setting process of step S171 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the fluctuation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (decision decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, reach effect and various types The presence or absence of execution of various effects such as advance notice effects and the manner and timing of execution start thereof are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (a set of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute an effect) in which the determination result and the like are reflected is set. Thereafter, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is ended. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative symbol according to the instruction to start execution of variable display of the decorative symbol.

  The variable display effect process of step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In the variable display effect process, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display an effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S 171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. Or, driving the movable body 32, outputting a voice or sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, a command (electric decoration signal) to the lamp control board 14 Various effect control is performed during the variable display of the decorative symbol, such as turning on / off / flashing the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by the output. After performing such effect control, for example, the end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol is read out from the effect control pattern, or the command specifying that the main decorative object 11 is made to stop and display the decorative symbol is received In response to what has been done, the fixed decoration pattern that is the display result of the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed. When the finalized decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the variable display effect processing ends.

  The process for waiting for a special figure in step S173 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "3." In the waiting process for the special view, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the effect control command designating start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received from the main board 11. Then, when the effect control command designating start of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state is received, if the command designates the start of the big hit gaming state, the value of the effect process flag is set to “6 Update to On the other hand, if the command designates the start of the small hit gaming state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4" which is a value corresponding to the small hit middle effect processing. In addition, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "lost" when the reception waiting time of the command elapses without receiving the command specifying that the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state is started. Thus, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value. When the value of the rendering process flag is updated, the special drawing hit waiting process is ended.

  The small hitting middle effect process of step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is "4". In this small hit medium effect processing, the CPU for effect control 120 sets, for example, a effect control pattern corresponding to the contents of the effect in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the setting contents. . Further, in the small hitting medium effect processing, for example, in response to the reception of a command specifying termination of the small hit gaming state from the main substrate 11, the value of the presentation process flag is a value corresponding to the small hit ending effect. Update to a certain "5" and end small hitting medium effect processing.

  The small hitting end effect process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is "5". In this small hitting end effect processing, the CPU for effect control 120 sets, for example, a effect control pattern and the like corresponding to the end of the small hit gaming state, etc., and various kinds of effect control at the end of the small hit gaming state based on the setting contents. Run. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value, and the small hitting end effect processing is ended.

  The jackpot inside effect process of step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In the big hit internal effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect contents in the big hit gaming state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit gaming state based on the setting contents. Further, in the big hit inside effect processing, the value of the effect control process flag is a value corresponding to the ending effect processing, for example, in response to the reception of the command specifying the end of the big hit gaming state from the main board 11 Update to 7 ′ ′ and complete the big hit internal rendering process.

  The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect process, the CPU for effect control 120 sets, for example, a effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the big hit gaming state, etc., and performs various effect control of ending effect at the end of the big hit gaming state based on the setting contents. Run. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" which is an initial value, and the ending effect processing is ended.

(Modification of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, but encloses the gaming media and gives a score based on the occurrence of a prize It may be an enclosed game machine.

  What is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol is only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-"), and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and the light-off of the symbol. Further, even when the symbol is displayed during variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (a symbol indicating “−” may not be displayed as a display result).

  In the above basic description, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but a medal is inserted, a predetermined bet number is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the control lever by the player. A slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to a player when the combination of stop symbols becomes a combination of specific symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by the player The present invention is also applicable to slot machines equipped with at least one of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (hereinafter referred to as a bonus etc.).

  The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed / provided by a removable recording medium to the computer device etc. included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the computer device etc. may be previously provided. It may be distributed by being installed in the storage device of Furthermore, by providing a communication processing unit, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. It does not matter.

  And the execution form of the game is not limited to that executed by attaching the removable recording medium, but can be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via the communication line etc. in the internal memory etc. It may be executed directly using hardware resources of another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

  In the present specification, expressions of comparison of various proportions such as the execution proportion of the rendition (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”, etc.) indicate that one is a proportion of “0%”. May be included. For example, it also includes that one is a proportion of “0%” and the other is a proportion of “100%” or a proportion less than “100%”.

(Description of feature portion 31AK)
Next, the feature portion 31AK of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining types of fluctuation patterns and reach in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 8A, in the present embodiment, the change display mode of the decorative symbol does not become the reach mode, and the non-reach loser fluctuation patterns PA1-1, PA1-2 in which the display result is "loss". Change pattern of the display of the variation pattern PA2-1-PA2-6, PA3-1-PA3-4, etc., the display result is "big hit", and the display result becomes "loss" because the form of the variable display of the decorative design becomes the reach mode. Variation patterns PB2-1 to PB2-6, PB3-1 to PB3-4, and the like are prepared.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 8B, in the present embodiment, reach effects such as normal reach and super reach A to E are performed. In this embodiment, the reach effect is also referred to as a suggested effect which suggests that the jackpot state is controlled. As shown in the number of black stars in FIG. 8B, the reliability (big hit reliability) when each reach is executed is: normal reach <super reach E <super reach D <super reach C <super reach B < <The order of Super Reach A is higher. In addition, you may provide the reach which determines becoming a big hit.

  In this embodiment, super reach is performed via normal reach. In addition, during the production of the reach of the super reach, there may be a case in which the development presentation is performed to develop (promote) to a more reliable reach. The variation patterns PA3-1 to PA3-4 and the like shown in FIG. 8A, and the variation patterns PB3-1 to PB3-4 and the like are variation patterns corresponding to execution of the development effect. Although FIG. 8 (A) shows a variation pattern in which the degree of reliability evolves to a super reach one stage higher, a variation pattern in which the degree of credibility evolves in two or more stages is also provided. Also, a variation pattern may be provided in which the development effect is performed a plurality of times.

  In this embodiment, except for the normal reach with the lowest degree of reliability, the title of the reach is notified at a predetermined timing after the reach is established. As shown in FIG. 8 (B), the notification mode of the title differs depending on the type of reach. Specifically, the super reach E with the lowest reliability among the super reach is notified of the title of the reach by display only, and the other super reach is notified of the title by display and voice. As described above, notification of a title is performed by more rendering devices in the case of the highly reliable reach than in the case of the less reliable reach. As a result, the player's sense of expectation can be effectively heard, and the effect of presentation is improved. Note that the notification mode of the title may be arbitrarily changed depending on the reliability or regardless of the reliability. Further, even in the same reach effect, the notification mode may be changed according to the actual display result or the like. Also, the font of the title character (such as gothic and Mincho type) and the typeface (such as a line and a calligraphy) may be made different depending on the type of reach.

  The notification of the title of reach (title notification) is not limited to the one indicating the title itself such as the name of the reach, but may indicate the name of the character appearing in the reach effect, the effect contents of the reach effect, and the like.

(Example of production operation of characteristic part 31AK)
Subsequently, an example of the rendering operation in the present embodiment will be described. The following rendering operation is executed by the rendering control CPU 120 executing rendering control process processing based on the rendering control command transmitted from the main substrate 11. FIG. 9 and FIG. 10 are diagrams showing an example of the production operation of super reach according to the present embodiment. FIG. 9A shows that variable display of decorative symbols is executed in each of the left, middle, and right decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. . Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIG. 9 (B), the decorative symbol indicating the numeral 7 on the "left" and the "right" is stopped to be in the reach mode. After that, the production branches depending on the type of reach.

(Super reach A)
In the case of becoming the super reach A, as shown in FIG. 9C, the character 31AK001, which is an ally character, is displayed on the image display device 5, and the reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation or the like using the character 31AK001 is displayed. As shown in FIG. 9D, the entire screen of the image display device 5 is displayed when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the introduction of the super reach effect (also referred to as super reach effect) is ended, for example. The title 31AK002 of Super Reach A (here, the letter "SP reach A") is displayed, and a voice (here, "Super reach A") corresponding to the title name of reach is output from the speaker 8 , And the title of Super Reach A is informed. After that, the title 31AK002 of Super Reach A is erased, and as shown in FIG. 9E, the character 31AK003, which is the enemy character, is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, or the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK003 are confronted. The following part of the reach effect of Super Reach A to be performed is executed. The production in which the characters face each other is also referred to as battle production, and it becomes a big hit when the ally character wins in the battle production, and loses when the ally character loses.

  In addition, when displaying words on the image display device 5 during the super reach effect, the voice corresponding to the words may be output from the speaker 8. Further, the dialogue is not limited to displaying in a balloon as shown in FIG. 9E, and may be displayed in the lower part of the image display device 5 or the like as a subtitle.

(Super reach B)
In the case of becoming the super reach B, as shown in FIG. 9C, the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5, and the reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation or the like using the character 31AK001 is displayed. When a predetermined period of time elapses after the start of the super reach effect, such as the end of the introductory portion of the super reach effect, as shown in FIG. 9F, the entire screen of the image display device 5 is a title 31AK005 of super reach B (here Then, the letters "SP reach B" are displayed, and a voice corresponding to the title name of reach (here, "super reach B") is output from the speaker 8, so that the title of super reach B is notified. Ru. After that, the title 31AK005 of Super Reach B is erased, and as shown in FIG. 9G, the character 31AK006, which is the enemy character, is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, or the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK006 face each other. The following part of the reach effect of Super Reach B to be performed is executed.

  As described above, in the super reach A and the super reach B, the reach title is notified when a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the super reach effect. By doing this, since the title can be notified after showing the introduced part of the super reach effect to the player, it is possible to enhance the effect of the title notification.

  Also, with Super Reach A (FIG. 9 (C) → (D) → (E) ... and Super Reach B (Fig. 9 (C) → (F) → (G) ...), the title is In the introductory part until it is alert | reported, super reach presentation is performed in a common presentation mode (FIG. 9 (C)). By doing this, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which super reach is to be achieved after the start of the super reach effect, and which title is to be notified. In Super Reach A and Super Reach B, it is not limited to completely sharing the presentation mode until the title is notified, and it is possible to determine which Super Reach will be achieved by watching the presentation, etc. The parts may be in a common presentation mode. For example, in the introductory part of super reach A and super reach B, super reach production (for example, production which displays an enemy character or suggests an enemy character) is executed in a mode related to a title notified thereafter You may By doing this, the rendering effect is improved, and the player pays attention to the rendering. In this manner, the title notification may be performed after it is possible to specify which super reach is to be made.

(Super reach D)
In the case of Super Reach D, as shown in FIG. 9H, the title 31 AK 007 of the Super Reach D (here, the characters “SP reach D”) is displayed on a part of the center of the image display device 5 At the same time, the sound of the title of Super Reach D is notified by the speaker 8 outputting a voice corresponding to the title of Reach (in this case, "kill the enemy"). As described above, in Super Reach D, a title is notified at the start of Super Reach production. Further, under the title 31AK007, an expectation degree indication 31AK008 that indicates the expectation of the reach is displayed. The degree of expectation is represented by the number of black stars, as shown in FIG. 9 (H). Here, the degree of expectation is the degree of expectation to be a big hit, but it does not have to completely match with the big hit reliability of the reach.

  In addition, the alerting | reporting by the audio | voice of super reach D is not alert | reporting a title name as it is, but the content of reach is alert | reported. As described above, in this embodiment, the notification mode of the title notification by voice is made different depending on the type of reach. As a result, the notification form of the title notification is diversified, and the interest is improved.

  After the title is notified in the super reach D, the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. At this time, the title 31 AK 007 and the expectation degree indication 31 AK 008 continue to be displayed by being reduced in the upper right portion or the like of the image display device 5. By doing this, the player can grasp the expectation of the reach even during the reach effect. In addition, in FIG.9 (I), although the production | presentation content in common with FIG.9 (C) (super reach A, super reach B) is shown, the super reach production only for super reach D may be performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 9J, the character 31AK009, which is the enemy character, is displayed, and the serif 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, or the reach effect of Super Reach D in which the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK009 are confronted is executed. Ru.

(Super reach E)
In the case of Super Reach E, as shown in FIG. 10A, the title 31AK010 of the Super Reach E (here, the characters “SP reach E”) is displayed on a part of the upper left of the image display device 5 Thus, the title of Super Reach E is informed. In Super Reach E, notification of a title by voice is not performed. Also, in conjunction with the display of the title 31AK010, the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK011 which is the enemy character are displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, or the reach effect of Super Reach E where the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK011 confront each other To be executed. As described above, in the Super Reach E, a title is notified along with the progress of the reach production. In Super Reach E, the title 31AK010 continues to be displayed during reach production.

  In the reach production of the super reach E having a low hit probability, it is possible to prevent giving an excessive sense of expectation to the player by performing the title notification without stopping the progress of the reach production. On the other hand, in the reach effects of the super reach A, the super reach B, and the super reach D, the progress of the reach effect is stopped and the title notification is performed (FIGS. 9 (D), (F), ( H)). By doing this, it is possible to execute the title notification according to the super reach effect, and the effect of the effect is improved. In addition, even in the case of super reach effects such as super reach A, super reach B, and super reach D, title notification may be performed without stopping the progress of the reach. Further, contrary to this embodiment, in the reach effect of the super reach with a high hit probability, the title notification may be performed without stopping the progress of the reach effect. In the super reach reach production with low jackpot reliability, the progress of the reach production may be stopped and the title notification may be performed.

(Title notification timing)
As described above, in this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, a title is notified after a predetermined period has elapsed after the start of Super Reach production, and in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, Super Reach production The title will be announced at the start. By doing this, it is possible to execute the title notification according to the reach effect, and the effect is improved. In this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, which have high jackpot reliability, a title is notified after a predetermined period has elapsed after the start of Super Reach production, and Super Reach D and Super Reach, which have low jackpot reliability, In E, the title was notified at the start of the Super Reach production, but in the case of a reach with high jackpot reliability, the title is notified at the start of Super Reach production, and in the case of a reach with low jackpot reliability The title may be notified after a predetermined period of time has passed after the reach effect.

(Display area of title)
Further, in this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, a title is notified on the entire screen (first area) of the image display device 5, and in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, the image display device 5 is The title is notified in a part (second area) of the screen of. By doing this, it is possible to execute the title notification according to the reach effect, and the effect is improved. In particular, in the case of a reach with a large hit reliability, since title notification is performed in a wider display area than in the case of a reach with a low reliability, effective title notification is possible. Note that the title notification on the entire screen of the image display device 5 may be one in which the title is displayed in a size that fits the screen, or the title is displayed on the entire background as a background for title notification. It may be something (title notification using the entire screen) or the like. Further, the display area for performing title notification may be different between Super Reach A and Super Reach B, and the display area for performing title notification may be different between Super Reach D and Super Reach E.

  The method of varying the display area for performing the title notification according to the reach effect is not limited to the example of this embodiment, and the display area for performing the title notification may be optionally changed according to the reach effect. For example, in the case of a reach with a high hit probability, title notification may be performed in a narrower display area than in the case of a reach with a low degree of reliability. Further, in the case where the display area to be notified of the title is made different according to the reach effect, the display area may be made different as in this embodiment, or the place to be displayed may be made different.

(Expected degree indication indication)
In this embodiment, super reach A and super reach B with high hit reliability do not display anticipation indication in the title notification in super reach A and super reach D with lower hit reliability than super reach A and super reach B. In the title notification in, the expectation indication was displayed. By doing this, it is possible to prevent the effects from being disturbed. In addition, in the title notification in Super Reach E whose jackpot reliability is lower than Super Reach D, the expectation indication is not displayed. By doing this, it is possible to prevent the player from losing a sense of expectation by displaying the expectation indication indicating that the reliability is low in the low reliability reach. Note that the expectation indication may be displayed on at least a part of Super Reach A, Super Reach B, and Super Reach E.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 9H and the like, the indication of the degree of expectation is not limited to the one indicated by the number of black stars, but may indicate the degree of expectation with a meter or gauge, or correspond to the degree of expectation You may make it display the numerical value. Further, as shown in FIG. 9H and the like, in the case of showing by the number of black stars, the number of stages of expectation may be increased by enabling display of a half equivalent (half) of black stars.

(Title display end timing)
Further, in this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, after the title is displayed, the title is erased and the super reach presentation is executed. Thereby, in the super reach A and the super reach B, attention can be paid to reach production. In addition, in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, after the title is displayed, the title continues to be displayed until a determined effect described later is executed. Thereby, in the super reach D and the super reach E, the type of reach can be grasped even during the super reach presentation. Moreover, by performing as described above, it is possible to execute the title notification according to the reach effect, and the effect of the effect is improved. It should be noted that the display end timing of the title may be arbitrarily changed since it is possible to improve the rendering effect regardless of the display end timing.

  In addition, although it is abbreviate | omitted about the production | presentation operation | movement of the reach production of the super reach C here, the title alert | report according to big hit reliability and an expectation degree suggestion display should just be performed, for example.

(Decided production)
After each reach effect is performed, when it is time to derive the display result (end of the variable display), a determined effect for notifying whether the display result is “big hit” is performed. The decision effect includes a decision effect indicating that the display result is a "big hit", and a decision effect indicating that the display result is a "loss". In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10B, the determined effect that the image 31AK012 is displayed on the image display device 5 is executed. Thereafter, if the display result is "big hit", as shown in FIG. 10C, an image 31AK013 indicating that the allied character has won is displayed, and as shown in FIG. The finalized design is derived. In addition, if a display result is "loss", the image which shows that the ally character loses is displayed, and the finalized decoration pattern used as a reach loss combination is derived | led-out.

  In this embodiment, even when the title is continuously notified even during the reach effect, the notification of the title is ended before the determined effect is executed. As a result, it is possible to make attention to the determined effect, and it is possible to execute a clear title notification.

  In the effect operation example shown in FIG. 9 and FIG. 10, during the reach effect of super reach, the decorative symbol is reduced at the lower right portion of the image display device 5 to perform variable display, but in the reach effect How to make the display of the decoration pattern of is optional. For example, the decorative design may not be displayed during the reach effect, or the display mode (size, position, shading, number, etc.) may be varied depending on the type of reach effect.

  In addition, when displaying a character that is permanently displayed during hold display, active display, variable display or display related to cell-phone interlocking on the image display device 5, the display is appropriately hidden in order to draw attention to the reach effect during the reach effect of the super reach. It may be At that time, during low-reliability reach effects such as Super Reach E, these displays may be kept displayed. In this way, it is possible to prevent the player from being excessively expected by the reach effect with low reliability, and to be able to pay attention to the reach effect in the highly reliable reach effect.

(Development production)
Subsequently, an example of the rendering operation when the development rendering is performed will be described. As shown in FIG. 11A, when the development effect is performed when the reach effect of the super reach D is being performed (the title notification of the super reach D is being performed), as shown in FIG. 11B. As shown, an effect such that the reach effect is interrupted and the screen is torn is performed. After that, when developing into Super Reach A, as shown in FIG. 11C, the title of Super Reach A is notified, and the reach effect of Super Reach A is executed. In the case of developing into Super Reach B, as shown in FIG. 11D, the title of Super Reach B is notified, and the reach effect of Super Reach is executed. As described above, when the development effect is executed, the title notification of the development source is switched to the title notification of the development destination, so that it can be easily understood which reach has been developed. As shown in FIG. 11, when the reach of the development destination is the reach for performing title notification by display and sound, title notification by display and sound is executed again.

  Note that the development effect is not limited to the example as shown in FIG. 11 (B), but may be an effect in which a crack is gradually broken on the screen, or a sandstorm (display as if it is broken) is displayed. You may do so. With such an effect, unexpected effects can be performed. In addition, there may be a development effect of Gasse, such as an effect in which a reach is not developed, although a crack gradually enters the screen.

(Expected degree suggestive production)
In the example of the rendering operation shown in FIG. 9 (H), a black star indicating the expected degree is displayed from the beginning that the expected degree indication 31AK008 indicates the expected degree, but five white stars are displayed at first, It may be made to execute an expectation degree suggestion effect which suggests an expectation degree by becoming a black star.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 12A, when notifying the title of Super Reach D, an expectation indication 31AK021 of five white stars is first displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 12 (B), a black star 31AK022 larger than the star of the expectation degree indication 31AK021 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 12 (C), the black star 31AK022 moves and the expectation degree indication 31AK021 A presentation is performed that fits within one of the white stars. At this time, an audio "pin" indicating that the black star indicating the degree of expectation has increased is output from the speaker 8. As shown in FIGS. 12 (D) and 12 (E), the same effect is repeated the number of times corresponding to the degree of expectation of reach. At this time, the sound (volume, scale, sound quality, etc.) outputted from the speaker 8 may be changed stepwise each time it is repeated (every number of stars). When the number of black stars corresponding to the degree of expectation is settled in the degree of expectation indication 31AK021, as shown in FIG. 12F, the black star is highlighted as if it were illuminated. By doing this, it becomes easy to understand that the expectation degree suggestion effect is finished.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 12 (A) to 12 (F), black stars are displayed one by one, and the degree of expectation indicated by the expectation indication indicates one step at a time, but two or more black stars The degree of expectation may be raised by two or more steps. In addition, half black stars may be displayed to increase the expectation by half. In this case, different sounds may be output or the same sound may be output depending on the number of stars to be displayed (the number of steps of rising expectation). For example, the same sound may be output when half a black star is displayed and when one black star is displayed. The same sound may be output when two and a half black stars are displayed and when three black stars are displayed. Also, there may be a case where the voice is not output. By doing this, the expectation degree suggestive effect is diversified, and the effect of the effect is improved. The same black star image is displayed regardless of the number of stages of expectation increasing at one time, and the number of black stars increases according to the number of stages of expectation increasing as it is displayed on the white star indicating the expectation degree indication. You may make it perform such an effect.

(Demonstration mode)
There may be a plurality of effect modes in the effect device such as the image display device 5, the speaker 8, and the game effect lamp 9. In the different rendering mode, even when the same command (for example, a command specifying a variation pattern) is transmitted from the main substrate 11, the rendering based on the command is executed in a different rendering mode. In each effect mode, the background, the character, the motif, the sound outputted from the speaker 8 and the like displayed on the image display device 5 may be different. The effect mode may be automatically changed according to the number of times of variable display or the game state, or may be changeable by the operation of the player.

  FIGS. 12G to 12L are example rendering operation examples of the title notification and the expectation degree suggestion rendering in the special mode when the normal mode and the special mode are provided as the rendering mode. In the normal mode, title notification and expectation degree suggestion effects are performed as shown in FIGS. In the special mode, the reach effect based on the variation pattern of the super reach D is the reach effect of the super reach D2 different in the effect mode from the reach effect of the super reach D. Therefore, when the variation pattern of the super reach D is specified, as shown in FIG. 12G, the title 31AK023 of the super reach D2 is displayed. At this time, a voice corresponding to the title name of reach is output from the speaker 8, but a voice different from the normal mode (for example, a voice having a different voice color) is output. Moreover, the expectation degree indication 31AK024 in the super reach D2 is not a star but a rhombus.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 12H, a black rhombus 31AK025 larger than the star of the expectation indication 31AK024 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 12I, the black rhombus 31AK025 moves and the expectation indication 31AK024 A presentation is performed that fits within one of the white diamonds of. At this time, the speaker 8 outputs a voice "pong" indicating that the black rhombus indicating the degree of expectation has increased. As shown in FIGS. 12 (J) and (K), the same effect is repeated the number of times corresponding to the degree of expectation of reach. When the number of black rhombuses corresponding to the degree of expectation is settled in the expectation degree indication display 31AK024, as shown in FIG. 12 (L), the black rhombus is highlighted as if illuminated. Thus, depending on the effect mode (the state when the reach effect is executed) determined according to the player's selection, the game state, etc., the effect is diversified by changing the notification mode of the title, and the effect is achieved. improves.

  Although FIG. 12 shows an example of the rendering operation when the variation pattern of the super reach D is designated, another reach rendering (title notification, expectation degree suggestion rendering) is performed depending on the rendering mode (state when the reach rendering is performed) May be made different. Depending on the effect mode (the state when the reach effect is executed), whether or not the reach title is to be notified or the execution ratio of the title notification may be made different. For example, when a predetermined effect mode is selected, the reach title may not be notified. By doing this, effects according to the player's preferences can be performed, and the effects of the effects can be improved.

  In this embodiment, the expectation degree is indicated by the number of black stars in the expectation degree indication display, and the expectation degree suggestion effect of increasing the number of black stars in a stepwise manner is performed, but the expectation degree It is also possible to execute an expectation indication effect of decreasing the number of indications suggesting a. Such an expected degree suggestive effect may be performed in addition to or in place of the expected degree suggestive effect of this embodiment.

(Other examples of developmental direction)
In the case of executing an expectation degree indication effect of increasing the display degree indicating the expectation degree of the expectation degree indication display step by step, the development effect may be performed after the display indicating the expectation degree is increased. In this case, when the display indicating the degree of expectation is increased after the development effect, the display to be increased may be displayed not in stages but at one time. For example, as shown in FIG. 13 (A), after the title of Super Reach D is notified and the effect of gradually increasing the black stars is completed, as shown in FIG. 13 (B), a button is displayed on the image display device 5 The development effect for displaying the image 31AK031 is executed. Here, when the operation to the push button 31B is detected, as shown in FIG. 13C, the title 31AK032 of Super Reach C (here, the characters “SP reach C”) is displayed, and thus the super The title of Reach C is informed. As described above, when the development effect is executed, the title notification of the development source is switched to the title notification of the development destination, so that it can be easily understood which reach has been developed. Further, under the title 31AK032, an expectation degree indication 31AK033 in which the number of black stars is three is highlighted. Even if the number of black stars increases by two or more, it is displayed at one time. In addition, after the movable body 32 operates, a development effect may be performed in which the title and the indication indicating the degree of expectation change.

(Notice production)
In this embodiment, as the notice effect, a title notice for giving notice of the jackpot reliability is executed according to a notification mode of the title (for example, the display color of the title, etc.). For example, as shown in FIG. 14A, while the title 31AK036 of Super Reach A is displayed in black and the voice corresponding to the title name of Reach is output from the speaker 8, the title of Super Reach A is notified. After that, as shown in FIG. 14 (B), a title preview in which the display color of the title 31AK036 changes to red is executed. As described above, the title is displayed in black when the title preview is not executed, and the title is displayed in a color other than black when the title preview is executed. In the title preview shown in FIG. 14, there may be a case where the display mode (display color) of the title changes after the reach title is notified by voice. By doing this, it is possible to enhance the staging effect of the preliminary presentation. Note that the timing at which the title is displayed other than black is not limited to this, and the title may be displayed other than black from the start of display of the title.

  In addition, when a title advance notice in which the display mode (display color) of the title is changed is executed, after the display mode of the title is changed, an audio according to the display mode after the change may be output. By doing this, it is possible to enhance the staging effect of the preliminary presentation. Further, the title notification by audio may be performed after the display mode (display color) of the title changes. In this case, sound may be output according to the display mode (display color) of the title after change.

(Title execution timing)
It is preferable to execute notification of a title during reach at a timing other than the execution timing of a presentation (specific presentation) such as a preliminary presentation production or a development presentation in which the degree of expectation controlled to the jackpot advantageous state is improved. By doing this, when the title is notified once, an effect of improving the expectation can be executed, so that the player's sense of expectation can be maintained.

  FIG. 15 is a flow chart showing an example of the advance presentation effect determination process for determining the presence or absence of the execution of the advance presentation effect and the presentation mode. The preview control effect determination process is executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the variable display start setting process of step S171 in FIG. In the advance presentation effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the variation pattern specified from the command transmitted from the main substrate 11 is a variation pattern of super reach (step 31AKS001).

  If it is the variation pattern of the super reach (step 31AKS001; Yes), the display color of the title of the super reach (presence or absence of the execution of the preview of the title) is determined (step 31AKS002).

  In step 31AKS002, depending on whether the display result is "big hit" or "loss", the display color of the super reach title is determined, for example, at the determination ratio shown in FIG. The display color of the Super Reach title changes from "Black" to "Red" or from "Black" to "Fruit" as shown in Fig. 16A. What changes from "red" to "fruit pattern" is provided, and the jackpot reliability is high in this order (ascending order). That is, the big hit reliability differs according to the change timing of the display color of the title. By doing this, the player pays attention to the change timing of the display color of the title, and the rendering effect is improved.

  In the "fruit pattern", the characters of the title may be displayed in bold and the characters themselves may be "fruit pattern", or the background portion of the display area of the title may be "fruit pattern" . There may be a pattern displayed as "fruit pattern" from the beginning. As for the display color changing, as shown in FIG. 14, the display color may change after the title notification is performed. There may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes with respect to the display color changing. Then, the big hit reliability may be made different according to the timing at which the display color changes. Further, since the display period of the title varies depending on the type of super reach, the timing at which the display color changes may vary depending on the type of super reach. In the case of a super reach (for example, super reach D or super reach E) in which the display period of the title is long, a plurality of changing timings may be provided to determine one of the changing timings. Then, in the case of a super reach (for example, super reach A or super reach B) in which the display period of the title is short, the number of changing timing may be one or less than the super reach in which the display period of the title is long.

  When the effect mode includes the normal mode and the special mode, the display color of the title is determined by the determination ratio shown in FIG. 16A in the normal mode, and in the normal mode as shown in FIG. 16B in the special mode. Determine the display color of the title at different rates. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from that in the normal mode. As described above, by making the execution mode (display color and change timing of the display color) of the preview of the title different depending on the effect mode, the effect is diversified and the effect is improved.

  In this embodiment, a serif notice for giving notice of the jackpot reliability is executed as the notice effect according to the display mode (for example, the display color of the line) of the character's serif in the reach effect of the super reach.

  After the display color of the Super Reach title is determined, the display color of the character's speech (the presence or absence of the serif announcement) in the reach effect of the Super Reach is determined (Step 31AKS003).

  In step 31AKS003, depending on whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "loss", the display color of the speech in the reach effect is determined, for example, at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 16C. As shown in FIG. 16C, the display color of the speech in the reach production changes from “white”, “red”, and “white” to “red”, and in this order (ascending order) Big hit reliability is high. That is, the big hit reliability differs according to the change timing of the display color of the speech. By doing this, the player pays attention to the change timing of the display color of the speech, and the rendering effect is improved. It should be noted that, for those whose display color changes, the display color may change after the words are displayed. There may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes with respect to the display color changing. Then, the big hit reliability may be made different according to the timing at which the display color changes.

  In addition, the jackpot reliability may be made different depending on the combination of the presentation style of the title preview and the speech preview. For example, when the same presentation mode (display color) is included in the title preview and the speech preview, the big hit reliability may be increased when the same presentation mode is obtained. Also, the big hit reliability may be made different depending on the combination of the change timing of the presentation mode with the title preview and the speech preview. For example, when the change timing is the same, the big hit reliability may be higher than when the change timing is different, or the big hit reliability may be different depending on which change comes first. By doing this, it is possible to pay attention to the change timings of the title preview and the speech preview.

  When the effect mode includes the normal mode and the special mode, in the special mode, the display color of the speech may be determined at a rate different from that of the normal mode. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from that in the normal mode.

  It should be noted that in place of the speech notice, a notice effect may be executed to give notice of the jackpot reliability by changing the effect mode of the reach effect. In that case, in the advance notice effect, a plurality of change timings of the effect mode may be provided, and the big hit reliability may be different according to the change timing.

  After determining the display color of the speech in the reach effect or when it is determined not to be the variation pattern of the super reach (step AK31 S001; No), the execution presence or effect mode is determined for other advance effects (step AK31 S004). Thereafter, the determination result in 31AKS002 to 31AKS004 is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (step AK31S005), and the advance presentation effect determination process is ended.

  In this embodiment, in the case of the super reach, it is possible to execute the title preview and the speech preview, but in the case of a specific super reach (for example, other than the low reliability super reach), the title preview. And at least one of the serif announcement may be made executable. In addition, although the title preview and the speech preview have been described as being determined by the determination ratio shown in FIG. 16, the determination ratio is arbitrary, and may be changed according to, for example, the type of super reach. By doing this, it is possible to execute the notice effect according to the type of reach, and the effect is improved.

  In this embodiment, the number of effect modes that can be executed (the number of display colors that can be displayed) is different between the title preview and the speech preview. By doing this, the effects are diversified and the effect is enhanced. In the title preview and the speech preview, the number of playable presentation modes may be arbitrarily changed, and the number and type of playable production modes may be the same. By doing this, it is possible to execute a notice effect with a sense of unity, and it becomes easier for the player to grasp the jackpot reliability.

(Effect production)
When the presentation mode of the title preview and the speech preview changes, a presentation may be performed that indicates that the presentation mode changes. For example, an action effect image may be displayed on the image display device 5, and an action effect in which the image acts on at least one of a title and a speech may be performed. Then, after the effect presentation is performed, the presentation mode (display color) of the title or speech may be changed. The effect mode (effect effect image etc.) of the action effect may be common to any of the title and the words. Note that there may be cases where the presentation mode of the title or speech does not change despite the action presentation being performed. In the case of executing the effect presentation, the presence / absence of the execution of the operation presentation, the execution timing, and the presentation mode may be determined based on the determination result of the title preview and the speech preview. Such determination may be performed in the process of step AK31 S004. For example, the ratio at which at least one of the presentation mode of the title preview and the speech preview changes (the rate at which the presentation mode changes due to the function presentation) may be different according to the presentation mode of the action presentation, The ratio (the ratio of acting on which effect mode) of the serif announcement and which presentation mode changes may be different, or the ratio of what color (in which stage) changes may be different. . By executing such an operation effect, the player becomes aware of which one of the title and the speech to act when the operation effect image is displayed, and the effect is improved. In addition, when there are a plurality of effect modes, the presence / absence of effect effects and effect modes may be determined at different rates according to the effect modes. By doing this, it is possible to execute the action presentation according to the presentation mode, and the presentation effect is improved.

  As another example of such effect presentation, at least one of the presentation aspect (display color) of either the title or the speech according to the presentation content of the reach presentation (for example, the action of the character, the presentation content in the battle presentation, etc.) May change. By doing this, the player pays attention to the contents of the reach effect.

  The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the feature portion 31AK, and various modifications and applications can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, all the characteristic parts described in the above embodiment are not essential components, and can be appropriately omitted.

(Sub liquid crystal)
As a sub display device different from the image display device 5, a sub liquid crystal may be provided on the game board 2 or the gaming machine frame 3. Although the term “sub-liquid crystal” is used here, the sub-display device may be configured of an organic EL or a dot matrix LED. The sub liquid crystal device may be fixed, for example, in the vicinity of the image display device 5, or may be movable or retractable. In the sub-liquid crystal, various effects such as display of preliminary effects and hold display are executed. For example, title notification may be performed in the sub liquid crystal. As in the super reach D and the super reach E of the above embodiment, when the title is continuously displayed even after the title notification, the title or expectation indication may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal. In this case, after notifying the title in the image display device 5, the sub liquid crystal may display the title and the indication of the degree of expectation. By doing this, it is possible to easily understand the title and the expectation indication which can display the title and the expectation indication without disturbing the super reach effect in the image display device 5.

  In the above embodiment, an example in which the present invention is applied to notification of a reach effect title as a suggested effect has been described, but the present invention is applied to title notification (information that mainly displays characters) regarding other effects. May be For example, in the case of executing pre-reading zone effect in which the background image in the image display device 5 is shifted to a plurality of zones (stage, effect mode, etc.) different as the pre-notice effect, for example, The present invention may be applied to the title notification of When presenting a mission (“Let's reach with 7”, “Eliminate an enemy using a stick controller, etc.”), and execute a mission effect that will be in the player's favor when the mission is achieved. The present invention may be applied to the title notification of a mission.

(Modified Example 1 of Feature 31AK)
In the above embodiment, when it is time to derive the display result, a determined effect for notifying whether the display result is a “big hit” is performed, and then the display result is displayed ( 10 (B)-(D). Instead of such a determined effect, at a predetermined timing before deriving the display result, an operation effect for urging the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is executed, and a predetermined operation is detected in the operation valid period. The display result may be indicated by displaying the outcome of the battle effect or by temporarily stopping the display result. By doing this, since the display result is indicated according to the operation of the player, it is possible to increase the player's willingness to participate in the game, and the interest is improved.

  FIG. 17 and FIG. 18 are diagrams showing an example of the production operation of the super reach in the modification in which the operation effect is executed and the display result is shown according to the operation. As shown in FIG. 17 (A), after reaching the reach mode in the image display device 5, for example, as shown in FIG. 17 (B), the character 31AK041 which is a friend character and the character 31AK042 which is an enemy character are displayed. As shown in FIGS. 17 (C) to 17 (F) and FIGS. 18 (G) to 18 (I), reach effect in which the character 31AK041 and the character 31AK042 are confronted is executed.

  Along with the reach effect, as shown in FIG. 17C, the small button image 31AK043 and the restriction line 31AK044 superimposed on the small button image 31AK043 are displayed at the lower right of the image display device 5. Thus, although the operation effect using the push button 31B is executed, it is suggested that the reception of the operation is currently restricted.

  In this modification, a plurality of types of operation effect images indicating that operation effects are to be executed are prepared. And big hit reliability differs according to which operation production image is displayed and operation production is performed. In addition, an image indicating that the operation effect is performed during the reach effect may be changed to a more reliable aspect.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 17D, a praying character 31AK045 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 17E, the praying character 31AK045 changes to a happy character 31AK046, and the small button image 31AK043 is a large button image 31AK047. Change to

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 18H, the cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 18I, the effect 31AK049 in which the bullet is fired from the cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and the bullet hits the large button image 31AK047. The effect 31AK050 is displayed. Then, the large button image 31AK047 changes to the stick image 31AK051.

  As described above, in this modification, an operation effect indicating that the operation effect image changes when the operation effect image changes is executed. Note that the operation effect image may change without the action effect. In addition, there may be a case where the operation effect image does not change even though the operation effect is performed. The rate at which the operation effect image changes may be different depending on the type of action effect.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 18J, the control line 31AK044 is erased and the stick image 31AK051 is enlarged and displayed at the central portion as shown in FIG. 18K before a predetermined time when the display result is derived. , A display prompting the user to pull the stick controller 31A is displayed. At this time, the operation to the stick controller 31A is an effective operation valid period.

  Here, when an operation to pull the stick controller 31A is detected, as shown in FIG. 18 (L), an image 31AK052 indicating that the teammate character has won is displayed. Thereafter, at the end of the fluctuation time, as shown in FIG. 18 (M), a finalized decorative symbol to be a big hit combination is derived. When an operation is not detected within a predetermined operation valid period, an image shown in FIG. 18L is automatically displayed.

  In this modification, there are a small button image, a large button image, and a stick image as the operation effect image, and the operation effect using these images is executed in the order of small button image <large button image <stick image The jackpot confidence is high. Even when the operation effect image with a low degree of reliability is displayed, the operation effect image with a high degree of reliability may be changed during the reach effect, so the effect of presentation is improved, and the player's expectation is improved. Can be maintained.

  In addition, in the rendering operation example shown in FIG. 17 and FIG. 18, the notification of the reach title and the indication of the degree of expectation are omitted, but in parallel with the reach rendering and the operation rendering shown in FIG. It may be performed. The determination relating to the operation effect or the operation effect image (presence or absence of the operation effect, the operation effect image to be displayed, the presence or absence of the action effect, etc.) may be executed in step 31AKS 004 of FIG.

(Modified Example 2 of Feature 31AK)
A suggestion display may be made to indicate the degree of expectation of control to an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state. For example, the shutter effect that performs the first indication display and the reach title effect that performs the second indication display may be performed. In the shutter effect, after the start of variable display, an effect of covering the screen with shutter display is performed. Further, in the reach title effect, an effect of displaying a reach title indicating the development destination of the reach effect after the reach is executed. When displaying either the shutter display or the reach title display, a specific image may be included and displayed. The reach title effect may be the same as the title preview of the above embodiment, or may be another effect determined in another process.

  The specific image is an image of high hit reliability that is displayed including a plurality of types of elements in the image. The plural types of elements include a banana image of element E1, a melon image of element E2, an apple image of element E3, a watermelon image of element E4, and a strawberry image of element E5. The fruit pattern image configured to include these elements E1 to E5 is a specific image. In any of the shutter display and the reach title display, all of the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to be visible. Further, the display sizes of the elements E1 to E5 constituting the specific image are changed and displayed according to the difference in display size between the shutter display and the reach title display. In addition, all of the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to fit in each of the shutter display and the reach title display.

  When the shutter effect is executed after the start of variable display, when the fruit pattern image is displayed, the big hit reliability is higher than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. In addition, when the reach title is displayed during the reach effect execution, when the display is performed with the fruit pattern image, the big hit reliability is higher than the time when the display is not performed with the fruit pattern image. When the fruit pattern is not displayed, for example, a plain image not including each of the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. In addition, the pattern of images other than a fruit pattern image may be prepared as an image which shows big hit reliability when shutter production and reach title production are performed. For example, white images <blue images <red images <fruit pattern images may be prepared in the order of the jackpot reliability (for example, a red shutter, a reach title of red characters, etc.). Then, depending on whether or not the display result of the variable display is a big hit, any one image pattern may be selected by a predetermined random number lottery.

  When performing a shutter display and a reach title display, even when a fruit pattern is displayed, notification that the speaker 8 outputs a common sound (melody) and notification by light emission of the game effect lamp 9 are performed. The light emission control of the common sound and the game effect lamp 9 indicates to the player that the fruit pattern is a special image. In performing such shutter display and reach title display, common notification on the fruit pattern is executed. In the reach title display, a specific sound (voice) is further output after the common notification. The output period of the common sound and the specific sound may partially overlap.

  FIG. 19 is a display screen diagram when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are performed. As shown in FIG. 19A, when the shutter effect is executed, the shutter image 31AK061 is displayed at the start of the variable display in the image display device 5. In the shutter image 31AK061, an image of a fruit pattern including all of the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. Further, at the time of the shutter effect execution, the notification to output the common sound (melody) by the speaker 8 is executed and the notification by the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 is executed. When the shutter that has been closed is opened, as shown in FIG. 19 (b), variable display of the decorative pattern is started. The downward arrow indicates the variable display of the left, middle and right symbols. When the variable display of the left symbol and the right symbol is temporarily stopped, as shown in FIG.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 19 (d), the super reach effect is started. For example, the variable display is displayed small at the upper right of the screen and the character is displayed on the left side of the screen. At the lower right of the screen, a reach title image 31AK062 is displayed, and the contents of super reach to be executed from now on are displayed as reach title display. In the reach title image 31AK062, an image of a fruit pattern including all the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. In the reach title image 31AK062, characters of "battle reach" indicating that reach effect with battle effect is to be executed are displayed.

  Further, at the time of the reach title effect execution, the notification to output the common sound (melody) by the speaker 8 is executed and the notification by the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 is executed. Further, after the common sound is output, an effect is performed in which the character emits a specific sound (voice) indicating that the big hit reliability is high, such as “Tsui Tsui”. Here, in the reach title effect, the size of the indication to be displayed is smaller than that of the shutter effect. However, as described above, in the reach title effect, the player can easily recognize that the fruit pattern image is displayed by outputting the specific sound. Although the case where the output period is completely divided has been described for the common sound and the specific sound, the output periods may partially overlap.

  Thereafter, a battle reach effect as shown in FIG. 19 (e) is executed. An enemy character is displayed on the left of the screen, and an ally character is displayed on the right of the screen. When the ally character wins the battle with the enemy character, the word "battle won!" Is displayed on the upper left of the screen. It is informed that the big hit was decided by having won the battle. When the battle effect is over, it returns to the variable display screen by the original number symbol. As shown in FIG. 19 (f), all the symbols are stopped, and a big hit symbol of "777" is displayed.

  As shown in FIGS. 19A and 19D, the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 are displayed including all the elements E1 to E5 constituting the fruit pattern image. In this manner, the fruit pattern image can be suitably displayed in any of the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 having different display sizes. This makes it possible to accurately convey that a fruit pattern image with a high hit probability has been displayed.

  In addition, the display size of the shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 19A is displayed larger than the display size of the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 19D. Therefore, the difference between the display size of the shutter image 31AK061 and the display size of the reach title image 31AK062 can be noticed.

  The shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 19A and the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 19D are displayed at different timings. In this way, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the fruit pattern image, which is a specific image, from being obscured by overlapping execution timings.

  The determination (the presence or absence of the shutter effect and the effect mode) relating to the shutter effect may be performed in step 31AKS 004 of FIG. At that time, the determination regarding the shutter effect may be performed based on the determination result of the display color of the title in step 31 AKS 002 of FIG. For example, when it is determined that the display color of the title is a fruit pattern, the shutter effect of the fruit pattern may be easily performed. Further, the determination of the reach title effect may be performed in step 31AKS 004 of FIG. 15 together with the determination of the shutter effect.

(Description of feature part 121IW)
Next, the feature part 121IW will be described. First, as shown in FIGS. 20-1 and 20-2, the pachinko gaming machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into an outer frame 121IW 001a formed in a vertically-long rectangular frame shape, and a game board constituting a game board surface It comprises a (gauge board) 2 (see FIG. 1) and a gaming machine frame (underframe) 121IW003 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2. In this game area, game balls as game media are fired from a predetermined ball striking device and are shot. In addition, in the gaming machine frame 121IW003, a glass door frame 121IW003a having a glass window is between the door opening position where the front surface of the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is opened centering on the left side and the door closing position where the front surface is closed. It is rotatably provided so that the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 121IW003a. When the glass door frame 121IW003a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

  In addition, the gaming machine frame 121IW003 can be opened by inserting a door key owned by a salesclerk or the like at a game arcade in front of a lock (not shown) and unlocking the game machine, and players other than the clerk can use the gaming machine frame 121IW003 and glass The door frame 121IW003a can not be opened.

  The main substrate 11 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state of being housed in a substrate case 121 IW 201 configured to be openable by the first member and the second member. In addition, on the main board 11, there are a setting key 121IW 051 for switching to a setting change state or setting confirmation state to be described later, and a setting value such as a jackpot probability (outfall rate) to be described later in the setting change state. A setting changeover switch 121IW052 which functions as a setting switch is provided.

  A setting switching main body provided with an operation section operable by the player such as the setting key 121IW051 and the setting switching switch 121IW052 is accommodated in the substrate case 121IW201 together with the main board 11, and the setting key 121IW051 and the setting switching switch 121IW052 Is exposed on the back side through an opening formed on the back right side of the substrate case 121IW201 so as to be operable without opening the substrate case 121IW201.

  The board case 121 IW 201 having the setting key 121 IW 051 and the setting change switch 52 is provided on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1, so when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the operation from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not This operation is possible by opening the gaming machine frame 3 using a predetermined door key. In addition, since the setting key 121IW051 requires the operation of the setting key owned by the store clerk or the like of the game arcade, only the store clerk who holds the setting key can be operated. The setting key 121IW051 is also a switch capable of performing an ON / OFF switching operation described later. In the feature portion 121IW, the door key and the setting key are illustrated as being separate keys, but one key may be shared.

  Further, in the substrate case 121IW201, a display monitor 121IW029 and a display switching switch 121IW030 for switching the display of the display monitor 121IW029 are disposed. The display monitor 121 IW 029 and the display switching switch 121 IW 030 are connected to the main substrate 11 and disposed at the upper left portion of the substrate case 121 IW 201. That is, the display monitor 121IW029 and the display switching switch 121IW030 are disposed on the front when the main substrate 11 in the substrate case 121IW201 is viewed. The main board 11 can not be viewed in the state where the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is not opened, so the front when viewing the main board 11 is the back side of the gaming board 2 in the state where the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is opened. It is the front at the time of visual recognition, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front of the main substrate 11 may be shared with the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the main substrate 11 is viewed.

  As described above, the setting key 121IW051 and the setting change switch 121IW052 in the main feature portion 121IW can not be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. There is a possibility that the setting key 121IW051 or the setting changeover switch 121IW052 may be operated from the inside or the like of the gaming island where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed. In the feature portion 121IW, as shown in FIGS. 20-2 and 20-3, the right end portion of the outer frame 121IW001a includes the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 52 when the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is closed. A security cover 121IW500A is attached which covers the right side of the substrate case 121IW201 from the back side. The security cover 121IW500A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 121IW500Aa facing in the front-rear direction and a long piece 121IW500Ab extending from the rear end of the short piece 121IW500Aa toward the left side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 And a transparent plate-like synthetic resin material. The upper and lower dimensions of the short piece 121IW500Aa are substantially the same as the upper and lower dimensions of the back plate of the substrate case 121IW201. The security cover 121IW 500A is fixed to the right end of the outer frame 121IW 001a via the front end of the short piece 121IW 500Aa.

  As shown in FIG. 20-2, the long piece 121IW500Ab contacts (or approaches) the right portion of the board case 121IW201 from the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state where the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is closed. Thus, the right side portion of the substrate case 121IW201 including the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 is covered from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Therefore, the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 can not be operated by the long piece 121IW500Ab. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 20-3, in the state where the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is opened, the setting key 121IW051 and the setting change switch 121IW052 move along with the gaming machine frame 121IW003, and from the long piece 121IW500Ab By being separated, the covering state by the long piece 121IW 500Ab is released, so that the operation becomes possible.

  That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature portion 121IW, in the state where the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is closed, the security cover 121IW500A restricts the operation on the operation unit including the setting key 121IW051 and the setting change switch 121IW052. In the state where the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is opened while the state is maintained, the restricted state by the security cover 121IW500A described above is released, and the operation of the setting key 121IW051 and the setting change switch 121IW052 is permitted. It becomes a state.

  Since the substrate case 121IW201 is provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is extremely difficult to access the setting key 121IW051 or the setting change switch 121IW052 in a state where the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is closed. The setting value can not be changed by operating the setting key 121IW051 or the setting change switch 121IW052 unless the store clerk or the like in the game arcade opens the gaming machine frame 121IW003 with the door key.

  However, even if the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is closed in a state where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed on a gaming island (not shown) of the game arcade, for example, with the other pachinko gaming machines adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1 Setting member 121IW051 on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by inserting an illegal member such as a wire or cell board from between the pachinko gaming machine 1 and a gaming apparatus such as a card unit installed between Because there is a possibility that an illegal act such as changing the setting value by operating the setting change switch 121IW052 may be performed, the setting cover 121IW051 is switched to the setting key 121IW051 by the security cover 121IW500A in a state where the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is closed. A restricted state in which the operation on the operation unit including the switch 121IW052 is restricted By being maintained, it is possible to suitably suppress the abuse.

  Also, even in the restricted state where the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is closed and the back right side of the substrate case 121IW201 including the setting key 121IW051 and the setting change switch 121IW052 is covered by the security cover 121IW500A, the substrate is transparent through the security cover 121IW500A having transparency. Since the main substrate 11 and the like accommodated in the case 121 IW 201 can be seen through, it is possible to easily confirm the mounting surface on which the electronic component such as the CPU 103 is mounted on the main substrate 11 and the condition of sealing and the like.

  In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes the program read from the ROM 101, and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progression of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, the CPU 103 can generate all of various random numbers used on the main substrate 11 side by executing a random number generation program.

  In the main feature portion 121IW, on the side of the main substrate 11, in addition to the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result determination, the random number value MR2 for the big hit type determination, the random number value MR3 for the variation pattern determination, and the common figure display result determination Numerical data representing each of the random number value MR4 and the random number value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 is controlled to be able to be counted. Note that other random values may be used to enhance the gaming effect. The random number values MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software update using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the gaming control microcomputer 100 or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the gaming control microcomputer 100. The random numbers used to control the progress of such a game are also referred to as gaming random numbers.

  In the ROM 101 of the microcomputer 100 for game control, various table data and the like used to control the progress of the game are stored in addition to the program for game control. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables shown in FIG. 20-4 and FIG. 20 etc., which are prepared for the CPU 103 to make various determinations and determinations. In addition, table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used for the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main substrate 11 in the ROM 101, and variation patterns of each symbol in the variable display such as a special symbol or a normal symbol The fluctuation pattern table etc. which store two or more kinds of fluctuation patterns which become are stored.

  In the determination table stored in the ROM 101, for example, a display result determination table (setting value 1) shown in FIG. 20-4 (A), a display result determination table (setting value 2) shown in FIG. 20-4 (B), In addition to the display result judgment table (setting value 3) shown in -4 (C), the big hit type judgment table shown in FIG. 20-5 (A), the big hit fluctuation pattern judgment table (not shown), the small hit fluctuation pattern judgment table ( The loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 20-6, the common drawing display result determination table (not shown), the common drawing variation pattern determination table (not shown), etc. are included.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature portion 121IW is configured to change the jackpot probability (out-rolling rate) according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using the display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the set value, the winning probability (out-rolling probability) of the big hit is changed . The set value is composed of three steps of 1 to 3. The payout rate is lowest when 1 is the lowest, and the payout rate becomes higher as the value becomes larger in the order of 1, 2 and 3. That is, when 1 is set as the setting value, the degree of advantage is the lowest for the player, and the degree of advantage increases stepwise as the value increases in the order of 2 and 3. In the present characteristic portion 121IW, the winning probability for the small hit is the same regardless of the set value.

(Display result judgment table)
FIGS. 20A to 20C are explanatory diagrams showing display result determination tables corresponding to the respective setting values. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101 and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with the MR 1 is set. In each display result judgment table, the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is 1 (first), that is, the first special symbol is a target of fluctuation indication, and the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is 2 (second) That is, for each of the cases where the second special symbol is subject to variable display, a judgment value for a big hit and a judgment value for a small hit are set.

  As shown in FIG. 20-4 (A), when using the display result determination table corresponding to setting value 1, the variation special figure designation buffer is the first, that is, the first special symbol is the target of variation display If it is determined that the set value is “2” or “3”, the jackpot is won with a lower probability (1/320 at the time of non-probability variation, 1/32 at the probability variation). On the other hand, a part of these judgment values is set as a judgment value corresponding to the small hit, and the small hit is won with the same probability (1/99) as when the set value is "2" or "3". It is supposed to Also, when the variation special figure designation buffer is the second, the same determination value as the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol Even if the subject is subject to variable display, it will win the jackpot with the same probability as when the first special symbol is subject to variable display (1/320 at the time of non-probability change, 1/32 at the time of probability change) Do. On the other hand, half of these determination values are set as determination values corresponding to small hits, so the probability is higher (1/2) than in the case where the first special symbol is targeted for variable display. It is supposed to win a win.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 20-4 (B), when using the display result judgment table corresponding to setting value 2, if the variation special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is "1". Wins a big hit with a higher probability than in a certain case (1/300 at non definite variation, 1/30 at definite variation). On the other hand, a part of these judgment values is set as a judgment value corresponding to a small hit, and the small hit is won with the same probability (1/99) as when the set value is "1" or "3". It is supposed to Also, when the variation special figure designation buffer is the second, the same determination value as the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol Even when the target of the variable display is selected, the jackpot wins the big hit with the same probability (1/300 at the non-probable change, 1/30 at the positive change) as in the case where the first special symbol is the target of the variable display. Do. On the other hand, half of these determination values are set as determination values corresponding to small hits, which is a higher probability than in the case where the first special symbol is targeted for variable display, and the set value It is supposed that the small hit will be won with the same probability (1/2) as in the case of “1” and “3”.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 20C, when using the display result determination table corresponding to setting value 3, the setting value is “1” when the variation special figure designation buffer is the first, A big hit is won with a probability (1/280 at the time of non definite variation and 1/28 at the definite variation) higher than the case of "2". On the other hand, a part of these judgment values is set as a judgment value corresponding to the small hit, and the small hit is won with the same probability (1/99) as when the set value is "1" or "2". It is supposed to Also, when the variation special figure designation buffer is the second, the same determination value as the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol Even if the subject is subject to variable display, it will win the jackpot with the same probability as when the first special symbol is subject to the variable display (1/280 when not positive change, 1/28 when positive change). Do. On the other hand, half of these determination values are set as determination values corresponding to small hits, which is a higher probability than in the case where the first special symbol is targeted for variable display, and the set value It is designed to win a small hit with the same probability (1/2) as when 1 is "1" or "2".

  That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value set at that time, and the value of MR1 corresponds to the big hit shown in FIGS. If it agrees with the hit judgment value, it decides to make it a big hit (big hit type A to big hit type C) regarding the special symbol. Also, if MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hits shown in FIGS. 20-4 (A) to (C), it is determined that the special symbol is to be a small hit. That is, the winning of the big hit and the small hit is decided with the probability according to the set value. The “probability” shown in FIGS. 20A to 20C indicates the probability (percentage) of becoming a big hit and the probability (percentage) of becoming a small hit. In addition, to decide whether to make a big hit is to decide whether to control to a big hit gaming state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B It is also to decide whether or not to make it a jackpot symbol. In addition, to decide whether or not to make a small hit is to determine whether to control the small hit gaming state, but the stop in the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B It is also to decide whether or not to make the symbol a small hit symbol.

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 20-4, although the case of the small winning probability being the same is shown regardless of the set value, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, as in the case of the jackpot winning probability, the smaller the winning probability may be set to increase as the setting value increases in the order of 1, 2 and 3. Further, in this case, the setting difference of the winning probability of the small hit may be made to be the same ratio as the setting difference of the winning probability of the big hit. Specifically, if the winning probability of the small hit in the setting value “1” is 1/100, the winning probability of the small hit in the setting value “2” is designed to be 1 / 93.75, The probability of winning a small hit at the setting value “3” may be set to 1 / 87.5.

  In addition, in the gaming machine in which the small hit is not provided, the configuration shown by the main feature part 121IW may be applied.

  Further, in the present characteristic portion 121IW, the CPU 103 is configured to determine whether to make a big hit or a small hit using the display result determination table shown in FIGS. 20-4A to 20C. A big hit judgment table and a small hit judgment table are provided separately, and the judgment of the big hit is the fluctuation display of the first special symbol regardless of the fluctuation special view designation buffer and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol. The common table may be used for the determination, and the small hit determination may be performed using separate tables for the first and second variation special-characteristic designation buffers.

  In addition, although the case where the advantage is higher in the order of the setting value “1” <the setting value “2” <the setting value “3” is shown in the present characteristic portion 121IW, for example, the order of the priority according to the gaming state May be configured to change. For example, the present invention is applied to a gaming machine which is controlled to a high probability / high base state, maintained at a high probability / high base state until the next big hit occurs, and obtained a prize ball having a small hit game. In this case, in the present example, as shown in FIG. 20-4, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, a small hit occurs with a high probability of 1/2, and a period in which a prize ball is easily obtained In the specific gaming state (in this example, high probability / high base state), unlike the other gaming states, it is difficult to generate a big hit (high probability / high base state tends to continue). The value “1” may be set to the highest degree of advantage.

  In addition, for example, after being controlled to the probability change state (high probability state), the same probability change when applied to a gaming machine in which the probability change state is terminated based on the execution of the variable display of the predetermined number of times (number of probability change terminations). If it is the number of terminations, the probability change continuation rate (the continuous rate) may increase in the order of setting value “1” <setting value “2” <setting value “3”.

  In addition, in this characteristic part 121IW, although a total of three setting values of 1 to 3 are provided as setting values that can be set to the pachinko gaming machine 1, the present invention is not limited to this, and pachinko gaming machines The set value that can be set to 1 may be two or four or more.

(Big hit classification judgment table)
FIG. 20A is an explanatory view of the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. In the main feature portion 121IW, the case of determining the jackpot type using the suspension storage based on the game ball having won the first start winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed), In the case of determining the jackpot type using the suspension storage based on the game ball winning in the second start winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed), the common jackpot type determination table Although configured to be used, different tables may be provided so that the ratio of determining which jackpot type is different.

  The big hit type determination table is a type of big hit from big hit type A to big hit type C based on a random number for big hit type determination (MR2) when it is determined that the variable display result is made a big hit symbol. It is a table that is referenced to determine which one.

  In the big hit type determination table shown in FIG. 20-5 (A), although the determination value corresponding to the random number for big hit type determination (MR2) is assigned to each setting value, the assignment is made to simplify the description. The ratio of the judged value is shown. That is, the ratio of which of the big hit type A to the big hit type C is determined is shown for each setting value. In addition, determination values corresponding to random numbers are actually assigned to the loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 20-6, which will be described later, and the non-reach loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. In order to simplify the above, the proportion of assigned judgment values is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 20-5 (A), in the jackpot type determination table, when the setting value is “1”, the proportion determined as the jackpot type C is high, and the setting value is “2”, When the percentage determined to be the big hit type B is high and the setting value is “3”, the determination value is assigned such that the percentage determined to be the big hit type A is high.

  Here, the jackpot type in the main feature part 121IW will be described using FIG. 20-5 (B). In the main feature part 121IW, a fanfare period, an interval period and an ending period in the big hit game are respectively defined for each big hit type. It is done.

  The fanfare period is, for example, a period in which the big hit opening process of step S114 is executed on the main substrate 11 side, and after the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the effect control board 12 side, the start of the big hit gaming state It is a period during which fanfare effect is performed as the effect operation to be notified.

  The interval period is, for example, a period in which the big hit post-processing of step S116 is executed on the main substrate 11 side, and after the round of opening the big winning opening on the effect control substrate 12 side is completed, It is a period during which the interval effect as the effect operation to notify the start of the round of is performed.

  The ending period is, for example, a period in which the big hit end processing of step S117 is executed on the main board 11 side, and on the effect control board 12 side, ending effect is executed as a rendering operation to notify the end of the big hit gaming state. Period.

  As shown in FIG. 20-5 (B), the fanfare period, interval period, and ending period become the longest in the case of the big hit type A, then become longer in the case of the big hit type B, and the most in the case of the big hit type C. It is set to be short.

  As described above, in the present characteristic portion 121IW, when the set value is “1”, the percentage determined to be the big hit type C is high, and the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period tend to be relatively short. On the other hand, when the set value is “3”, the percentage determined to be the jackpot type A is high, and the fanfare period, interval period, and ending period tend to be relatively long. Therefore, the average period of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period becomes longer in the order of the setting value “1” <“2” <“3”.

  The feature part 121IW is configured such that the winning probability (out-rolling rate) of the big hit becomes higher in the order of the set values “1” <“2” <“3”, but at the same time, the set value “1” In the order of “<2” <“3”, the average period of the fanfare period, the interval period and the ending period is also configured to be longer. With such a configuration, when the winning probability (out-rolling rate) of the big hit is set high, it is possible to lengthen the average period of the fanfare period, interval period and ending period, that is, to delay the progression of the game, Can be prevented from becoming too high.

  In this feature part 121 IW, during the big hit game, it is configured to be able to execute a big hit inside suggestion effect (details will be described later) suggesting the setting value, but this big hit inside suggestion effect during fanfare period, interval period and ending It is feasible in the period. Such a configuration can enhance the interest of the fanfare period, interval period, and ending period. In addition, it is possible to make it difficult to notice the length of each period by directing the player's attention to the jackpot suggestion effect.

  In addition, in the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period, a common effect may be performed regardless of the length of the set period. In this case, it is desirable that effects (for example, display of a still image, etc.) which are difficult for the player to notice the length of the period are executed in common.

  In the feature portion 121IW, a fanfare period, an interval period, and an ending period are set for each jackpot type, and the configuration is such that the ratio of determining which jackpot type is determined for each setting value is different. When the winning probability (out-rolling rate) is set to a high setting, the average period of the fanfare period, interval period and ending period is lengthened, that is, the progress of the game is delayed, but the invention is not limited to such a configuration. The fanfare period, the interval period and the ending period may be fixedly set for each value. Further, for example, one of a plurality of types of fanfare periods, interval periods, and ending periods having different predetermined periods may be determined by lottery. In this case, a table is used in which the determination values are set such that the proportion of selection of the fanfare period, interval period, and ending period, in which relatively long periods are set in the order of jackpot type A <B <C, is high. Thus, the average value of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period can be made longer in the order of “1” <“2” <“3” in the setting value.

  In this feature portion 121IW, in any case of big hit type A to big hit type C, time saving control and probability variation control executed after the end of the big hit gaming state is a predetermined number of times (100 times for the present feature portion 121IW). The game is ended by the game being played or the big hit game state being made before the predetermined number of special game is played, but for example, the number of times of the time saving control and the probability variation control is made different for each big hit type In the case of a specific big hit type, high probability control and time saving control which are executed after the end of the big hit gaming state are continuously executed until a big hit occurs again after the end of the big hit gaming state. It may be done. In the case of such a specific jackpot type, the jackpot gaming state is continuously generated without passing through the normal state, ie, a so-called continuous state. In this feature portion 121 IW, the percentage of big hit differs for each setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but in addition to or instead of such a configuration, the probability variation continues for each setting value The rates may be different.

  Also, in the main feature part 121IW, there is no difference in the degree of advantage (for example, the number of rounds in the big hit game, presence or absence of time reduction control and probability change control, number of controls, etc.) in big hit type A to big hit type C, fanfare period, interval Although the average period of the period and the ending period is configured to be different, for example, the number of rounds in the big hit game, the presence or absence of time reduction control and probability change control, the number of control times are different for each big hit type, and the degree of advantage is different. You may do so. In this case, the effects in the round may be different for each jackpot type, or may be the same regardless of the jackpot type.

  In the present characteristic portion 121IW, according to the set value, the big hit type when the variation display result is a big hit is determined at a different ratio from the big hit type A, the big hit type B, and the big hit type C. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and depending on the set values that are set, among the big hit type A, the big hit type B, and the big hit type C, the big hit type that can not be determined is one or There may be more than one. That is, depending on the set value being set, the determination ratio of the jackpot type may differ by not determining any one of the jackpot types (the determination ratio is 0%) or 100% of the specific jackpot types. It is included to determine in proportions.

  In addition, although the case where the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are different according to the big hit type is shown in the present characteristic portion 121IW, the fan fare period, the interval period and the ending are not limited to such modes. The periods may be configured to be different. For example, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period according to the setting value may be uniformly determined according to which of the setting values “1” to “3”. In addition, for example, according to which of the set values “1” to “3”, the lottery process with the selection probability according to the set value is performed to determine the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period. You may

  As described above, in the main feature portion 121IW, since the determination ratio of the jackpot type when the variation display result is the jackpot differs according to the set value set, it is possible to improve the game interest. .

  In the present characteristic portion 121IW, the big hit type is determined using MR2 which is a random number value for big hit type determination, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the big hit type is the result of displaying the special figure You may determine using MR1 which is a random value for determination.

  Further, in the main feature portion 121IW, the larger the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player (the big hit probability and the small hit probability increase, and the big hit type C as the big hit type is easily determined) However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the smaller the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it may be for the player.

  Further, in the present characteristic portion 121IW, while the big hit probability changes in accordance with the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the game property itself is not changed, but the present invention is limited thereto. The game property may be changed according to the setting value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 instead.

  For example, when the setting value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the gaming property (so-called probability variation loop type) in which the big hit probability in the normal status is 1/320 and the probability status is 65% If the setting value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the game ball is provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 in a specific round during a big hit in the normal state with 1/200 of the big hit probability in the normal state While controlling the gaming state after the end of the big hit game to a definite change state based on passing the predetermined count switch, the game where the game ball passes the count switch in the big hit game according to the big hit type differs If the set value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the big hit probability is 1/320 and the small hit probability is 1/50. Also as a game property (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) which is controlled to the big hit game state on the basis of passing the specified count switch which is provided inside special variable winning a prize ball device 7 (during time saving control) Good. Furthermore, although the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the same as 1 to 3 in the game property, the big hit probability and the small hit probability are higher than the case where the setting values are any of 1 to 3 A setting in which the number of award balls obtainable during the big hit game is small (for example, when the setting value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4) may be provided.

  Furthermore, as described above, in the case where the game property is changed in accordance with the set value, the common switch may be used for different applications. Specifically, in the case of the above-described example, when the set value is 1 or 4, a predetermined count switch provided in the special variable winning prize ball device 7 is a switch for effect (a game ball passes the count switch) Use as a switch to perform a predetermined effect each time you set, if the setting value is 2 or 3, the game switch (game ball is a predetermined count switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 The game state may be used as a switch for controlling the gaming state to a probability change state or a big hit gaming state based on passing through the count switch.

(Small hit classification judgment table)
FIG. 20C is an explanatory diagram of the small hitting type determination table stored in the ROM 101. As shown in FIG. 20-5 (C), in the present characterizing portion 121IW, small hit types A to C are provided as the small hit types. As shown in FIG. 20-5 (C), in the present characterizing portion 121IW, the determination ratio of the small hitting types A to C is the same regardless of which of the setting values “1” to “3”.

  Further, in the feature portion 121IW, regardless of which of the small hitting classifications A to C, the opening period and opening number of the big winning opening in the small hitting game are the same, and the degree of advantage in the game is the same. .

(Variation pattern judgment table)
The ROM 101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining a variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination, and the variation pattern is one of the plurality of types described above according to the result of the prior determination. Decide on one of the fluctuation patterns.

  Specifically, as the variation pattern determination table, the big hit variation pattern determination table used when it is previously determined that the variation display result is "big hit", and the "small hit" variation display result A small hit variation pattern determination table to be used when is pre-determined, and a loss variation pattern determination table to be used when it is pre-decided to set the variation display result to "lost" is prepared in advance. .

(Loss change pattern judgment table)
FIG. 20-6 is an explanatory diagram of a loss change pattern determination table. In the feature portion 121IW, a period (hereinafter, also referred to as a special period) until the variation display is performed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example) from the time when the setting change is performed at power on. Hereinafter, different loss variation pattern determination tables are used in different periods of time).

  Specifically, in the special period, the variation pattern is determined using the first loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 20A, and in the non-special period, it is illustrated in FIG. The variation pattern is determined using the second loss variation pattern determination table. In addition, in the present characteristic portion 121IW, a period from the time when the setting change is performed at the time of power on to the time when the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example) is a special period. For example, regardless of whether or not the setting change is performed when the power is turned on, the period until the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example) may be set as the special period. Also, using a real time clock or the like, a special period may be used if it is a predetermined time zone (for example, from 9 am to 11 am). Also, a period until the first big hit occurs may be set as a special period.

  The first and second loss variation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 20-6 (A) and (B) are normal reach loss and super reach loss in the order of setting value “1” <“2” <“3”. Judgment values are assigned such that the ratio is high and the ratio of non-reach lost is low. With such a configuration, the execution ratio of normal reach and super reach differs according to the set value, so the set value is suggested by the frequency at which the normal reach and the super reach are performed.

  The first loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 20-6 (A) has a higher ratio of normal reach loss than the second loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. Judgment values are assigned such that the difference in the ratio of normal reach loss between the two becomes large. With such a configuration, in the special period, the difference in the frequency of executing the normal reach is more easily recognized than in the non-special period (that is, it becomes easy to recognize the suggestion of the set value). Can increase the fun of the game.

  Note that, for example, a variation pattern with super reach (or a particular variation pattern thereof) is determined at the same rate regardless of the difference in the set value (or regardless of the difference between the special period and the non-special period). You may By doing this, depending on the set value, only the specific variation pattern (in this example, normal reach loss) the execution rate will be different, and the setting value is suggested by the frequency at which the specific variation pattern is executed. become. In addition, conversely, according to the set value, the selection ratio of the fluctuation pattern which causes the super reach loss may also be changed.

  The first and second loss variation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 20-6 (A) and (B) are either normal reach loss or super reach loss depending on the set value, except for non-reach loss. Judgment values are assigned such that the proportion of (i.e., the normal reach loss: the balance of super reach loss) is different. Specifically, in the first loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 20-6 (A), the ratio of the normal reach loss becomes extremely high in the order of the set value “1” <“2” <“3” (this example) In the second loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 20-6 (B), the normal reach loss is set in the order of the setting value “1” <“2” <“3”. Is set to be slightly higher (in this example, 0.2% higher). With such a configuration, the setting value is suggested by the selection tendency of the normal reach loss and the super reach loss. Moreover, the difference in selection tendency can be increased between the special period and the non-special period.

  In the feature portion 121IW, although the setting suggestion effect can be executed at different rates according to the set value, this means that the execution rates of the entire normal reach loss and the super reach loss differ according to the set value, and according to the set value This is a concept including that the execution ratios of normal reach loss and super reach loss are different, and that the execution ratio of only normal reach loss differs depending on the set value.

  In the feature portion 121IW, the common background image is displayed on the image display device 5 when any of the first and second loss variation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 20-6A and 20B is used. To display the variation of the decoration pattern. Further, even when the setting value is set to any of 1 to 3, the image display device 5 displays a common background image, and performs variation display of the decorative pattern. Note that a dedicated background image may be displayed only during a special period or a period from when the power is turned on until the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example). With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game from the special period or the time the power is turned on until the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example).

  The present invention is not limited to the example of the characteristic portion 121IW, for example, a special variation pattern that suggests a setting value (e.g., a variation pattern having a pattern of variation display of a decorative pattern different from a normal pattern and a setting value of 1 or 2). And the special variation pattern may be selected only in a special period. With such a configuration, it is also possible to give motivation to play a game in a special period, and to enhance game fun.

(Non-reach loss fluctuation pattern judgment table)
FIG. 20-7 is an explanatory view of a non-reach loss change pattern determination table. In the feature portion 121IW, a plurality of non-reach loss variation patterns having different variation times are provided, and when the variation pattern is determined to be a non-reach loss, it is determined which one of the non-reach losses A to C. Is configured. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, for example, non-reach losses A to C are included in the lost fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 20-6, and any of non-reach losses A to C, normal reach loss, and super reach loss It may be configured to make decisions.

  As shown in FIG. 20-7, in the non-reach loss variation pattern determination table, when the setting value is “1”, the ratio determined as non-reach loss C (variation time 7 seconds) is high, and the setting value is “2 If the ratio is determined to be non-reach loss B (variation time 8 seconds) is high, and the setting value is “3”, the ratio determined to non-reach loss A (variation time 9 seconds) is high The judgment value is assigned to.

  In the present characteristic portion 121IW, when the set value is “1”, the proportion of being determined as non-reach loss C is high, so the fluctuation time at non-reach loss tends to be relatively short. On the other hand, when the set value is “3”, the ratio of determination as non-reach loss A is high, so the fluctuation time at non-reach loss tends to be relatively long. Therefore, the average fluctuation time becomes longer in the order of the set value “1” <“2” <“3”.

  The feature part 121IW is configured such that the winning probability (out-rolling rate) of the big hit becomes higher in the order of the set values “1” <“2” <“3”, but at the same time, the set value “1” In the order of “<2” <“3”, the average fluctuation time is also increased. With such a configuration, it is possible to lengthen the average fluctuation time, that is, to delay the progression of the game when the jackpot probability (out-rolling rate) for the big hit is set to be high, that is, the euphoria becomes too high. It can be prevented.

  In the present characteristic portion 121IW, the average fluctuation time is configured to be different by changing the ratio of which one of the non-reach loses A to C the fluctuation time is different depending on the set value. A plurality of types of fluctuation patterns other than reach loss (for example, normal reach loss, super reach loss, etc.) may be provided so that the fluctuation time may be different, and the selection ratio may be different according to the set value. When a plurality of variation patterns (for example, normal reach loss, super reach loss, etc.) are provided so that the variation time is different, the time of swing display or high-speed variation display of the decorative pattern is made different, etc. It is desirable to make sure that there is no difference in appearance.

  Further, in the present characteristic portion 121IW, the average fluctuation time is configured to be different according to the set value, but instead of or in addition to such a configuration, the finalized decorative symbol (final The period in which the stop symbol is stopped and displayed may be different. With such a configuration, when the winning probability of big hit (dispense rate) is set high, it is possible to lengthen the period in which the finalized symbol (final stop symbol) is stopped and displayed, that is, to delay the progress of the game. It is possible to prevent the irritability from becoming too high.

  In the feature portion 121IW, the fluctuation time is set to each of the non-reach losses A to C, and the ratio of the non-reach losses A to C to be determined is different for each set value, thereby winning the big hit. When the probability (outgoing ball rate) is set high, the average fluctuation time is lengthened, that is, the progress of the game is delayed, but the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, but fluctuation time of each fluctuation pattern for each set value Is fixedly set, and the setting may be such that the variation time is longer if the jackpot probability (out-rolled ball rate) is set high.

  In the present characteristic portion 121IW, a variation pattern for shortening is provided in which the variation time is shorter than other variation patterns. For example, a fluctuation pattern of shortening non-reach loss (variation time 1.5 seconds) in which the fluctuation time is shorter than non-reach loss A (variation time 9 seconds) is provided. The variation pattern for shortening is configured to be used, for example, when the number of pending storages is equal to or more than a predetermined number (for example, 3). In such a configuration, when the number of pending storages reaches the upper limit or is close to the upper limit, this state is canceled and the variable display is performed efficiently (that is, the game is efficiently advanced) ) Is intended. Therefore, it can be said that it is inappropriate to delay the progress of the game when the number of held memories is equal to or more than the predetermined number. Therefore, in the present characterizing portion 121IW, the fluctuation pattern for shortening used when the number of pending storages is equal to or more than the predetermined number has a common fluctuation time regardless of the setting value. In addition, regardless of the configuration of the feature portion 121IW, the fluctuation time may be varied according to the set value also for the fluctuation pattern for shortening used when the number of pending storages is equal to or more than the predetermined number.

(Setting change process)
Next, the change of the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present characteristic portion 121IW will be described. FIGS. 20-8 and 20-9 are flowcharts showing the game control main processing in the feature portion 121IW. In the present characteristic portion 121IW, the processes of steps IWS001 to S002 are the same as the processes of steps S1 to S2 shown in FIG.

  When initialization is performed, the CPU 103 waits for effect control means activation to measure the time until the effect control means (specifically, the effect control CPU 120) starts when power supply to the game machine is started. The timer is set (step 121IWS003). In this case, in the effect control means activation waiting timer, a sufficient time is set from when power supply to the gaming machine is started until the effect control CPU 120 is activated. Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the effect control means activation waiting timer (step 121IWS004), and checks whether the value of the effect control means activation waiting timer after subtraction is 0 (step 121IWS005). If the value of the effect control means activation waiting timer is not 0, the process returns to step 121IWS004, and the process of step 121IWS004 to S005 is repeatedly executed. If the value of the effect control means activation waiting timer is 0, the process proceeds to step 121IWS006.

  By executing the processing of step 121 IWS 003 to S 005, after waiting for the effect control CPU 120 to be activated, the processing of step 121 I WS 006 and subsequent steps is executed to execute change and confirmation of setting values, initialization of RAM, recovery processing, etc. Be done. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation where various commands such as a setting value command, an initialization designation command, and a recovery command which will be described later are transmitted before the CPU 120 for effect control starts up. It can be prevented from occurring.

  Next, the CPU 103 sets, for example, the factory default setting flag indicating that the setting at the time of factory shipment is left in the RAM 102 (for example, this flag is cleared even if the RAM clear processing 1 and 2 and recovery processing described later are executed). To be cleared, and to be cleared when the setting change processing described later is executed), and to confirm whether or not this factory default setting flag is set in step 121IWS006. do it. In addition, for example, a value (for example, “0” or “−”) indicating that it is the factory default is set as the setting value, and the value of the setting value is set in step 121IWS006. It may be checked whether or not it is the factory default value. If it is the setting at the time of factory shipment (step 121 IWS006; No), the process proceeds to step IWS010.

  If it is not the factory default setting (step 121 IWS006; Yes), that is, if the setting value has already been changed at least once, the CPU 103 performs backup in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) by the same processing as step S4. It is determined whether data is stored (step 121 IWS 007). Specifically, in step 121IWS 007, the CPU 103 determines whether the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step 121IWS007; No), the process proceeds to step IWS010.

  When backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step 121 IWS 007; Yes), the CPU 103 performs data check of the backed up data by the same process as step S5 (performed using an error detection code), and the data is normal. It is determined whether or not it is (step 121IWS008). Step 121 IWS 008 determines whether the data in the RAM 102 matches the data at the time of the power supply stop, for example, by the parity bit or the checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal. If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step 121IWS008; No), the process moves to step IWS010.

  If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step 121IWS008; Yes), the CPU 103 checks whether a setting change in progress flag indicating that the setting value is currently being changed is set (step 121IWS009). ). If the setting change in progress flag is set (step 121IWS009; No), that is, if the power supply to the gaming machine is resumed due to power interruption or the like during the change of the setting value, the process proceeds to step IWS010.

  At step 121 IWS010, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a RAM abnormal error notification command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 121 IWS010). The CPU 103 may perform control to display a display (for example, a display of “E”) indicating that the error is a RAM error in the display monitor 121IW029.

  Next, the CPU 103 determines whether the output signal from the door opening sensor 121IW090 is on (step 121IWS011). If the output signal from the door opening sensor 121IW090 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether the setting key 121IW051 is on (step 121IWS012). If the setting key 121IW051 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether the output signal from the clear switch is on (step 121IWS013). If the output signal from the clear switch is on, the CPU 103 executes the RAM clear 1 process (step 121IWS014). In the RAM clear 1 process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flag, counter, and buffer stored in the RAM 102, and sets an initial value in the work area. However, in the RAM clear 1 process, an area other than the area for storing performance display information such as continuity ratio, duty ratio, and base among the storage area of the RAM 102 is cleared, and performance display such as continuity ratio, commission ratio, and base Information is not cleared and kept. Further, in the RAM clear 1 process, the value of the setting value stored in the RAM 102 is also cleared. Then, the process proceeds to step 121IWS027.

  On the other hand, when the output signal from the door opening sensor 121IW090 is off (N in step 121IWS011) or when the setting key 121IW051 is off (N in step 121IWS012), when the output signal from the clear switch is off (N) In step 121 IWS013, “N” is not transferred to step 121 IWS014, but is transferred to loop processing.

  When the process of step 121 IWS006 to S014 is executed, the backup RAM is not normal in this feature portion 121 IW (N in step 121 IWS 007, S 008), or remains in the factory default setting (step 121IWS006 Y) If power interruption occurs during setting change (Y in step 121IWS009), the setting key 121IW051 is turned on and the clear switch is turned on with the gaming machine frame 121IW003 open. The RAM is cleared on the condition that the change is made, and it becomes possible to change the set value after step 121IWS027. On the other hand, unless the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is opened and the setting key 121IW051 and the clear switch are not turned on, loop processing is executed, setting values can not be changed, and gaming control does not proceed.

  If the setting change in progress flag is not set (step 121IWS009; No), the CPU 103 determines whether the output signal from the clear switch is on (step 121IWS015).

  If the output signal from the clear switch is not on, the CPU 103 determines whether the output signal from the door opening sensor 121IW090 is on (step 121IWS016). If the output signal from the door opening sensor 121IW090 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether the setting key 121IW051 is on (step 121IWS017). If the setting key 121IW051 is on, the CPU 103 transmits a setting confirmation process start command indicating that the setting confirmation process is to be started to the effect control board 12 (step 121IWS018).

  On the effect control board 12 side, when the setting confirmation process start command is received, control to notify that the setting is being confirmed is performed (for example, a predetermined image is displayed on the image display device 5 or predetermined from the speakers 8L and 8R) Output a sound of the light, or emit a decorative light such as a decorative LED in a predetermined manner). In this case, when an operation button for effect such as the push button 31B is pressed on the effect control board 12 side, it may be displayed as "maintenance mode" or the like to shift to the maintenance mode. “Maintenance mode” means, for example, setting the date and time of the real-time clock, the history of occurrence of various errors (recording when and what kind of error occurred), the setting change history (when the setting value was changed or after the change) In this mode, it is possible to check the recording of the setting value. When the setting key 121IW051 is turned off and the setting confirmation process or the setting change process is completed, the maintenance mode is also ended.

  Next, the CPU 103 executes a setting confirmation process (step 121IWS019).

  When the setting confirmation process is completed, the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step 121IWS020) for returning the internal state of the main substrate 11 to the state at the time of stopping the power supply by the same process as step S6. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the storage content of the RAM 102 (content of backed up data). Next, the CPU 103 transmits a setting confirmation process end command indicating that the setting confirmation process is ended to the effect control board 12 (step 121IWS021). Then, the process proceeds to step 121IWS034.

  On the other hand, when the output signal from the door opening sensor 121IW090 is not on (N in step 121IWS016) or when the setting key 121IW051 is not on (N in step 121IWS017), the CPU 103 performs the same process as step S6. Thus, recovery processing (step 121IWS022) is performed to restore the internal state of the main substrate 11 to the state at the time of stopping the power supply. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the storage content of the RAM 102 (content of backed up data). Further, the CPU 103 transmits, to the effect control board 12, an effect control command for instructing recovery from power failure by the same processing as step S 7 (step 121 IWS 023). Then, the process proceeds to step 121IWS034.

  If the output signal from the clear switch is on, the CPU 103 executes the RAM clear 2 process (step 121IWS024). In the RAM clear 2 process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process to clear the flag, counter, and buffer stored in the RAM 102, and sets an initial value in the work area. However, in the RAM clear 2 process, an area for storing performance display information such as a ratio, a duty ratio, and a base among the storage areas of the RAM 102 and an area other than an area for storing a set value are cleared. The information for performance display such as the duty ratio and the base, and the information of the setting value are not cleared but are held.

  Next, the CPU 103 determines whether the output signal from the door opening sensor 121IW090 is on (step 121IWS025). If the output signal from the door opening sensor 121IW090 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether the setting key 121IW051 is on (step 121IWS026). If the setting key 121IW051 is on, the CPU 103 sets a setting change flag (step 121IWS027).

  Next, the CPU 103 transmits a setting change process start command indicating that the setting change process is to be started to the effect control board 12 (step 121IWS028). On the effect control board 12 side, when the setting change processing start command is received, control to notify that the setting is being changed is performed (for example, a predetermined image is displayed on the image display device 5 or predetermined from the speakers 8L and 8R) Output a sound of the light, or emit a decorative light such as a decorative LED in a predetermined manner).

  Next, the CPU 103 executes setting change processing (step 121IWS029).

  When the setting change process is completed, the CPU 103 resets the setting change in progress flag (step 121IWS030). Further, the CPU 103 transmits a setting value command indicating the set value which has been set to the effect control board 12 (step 121 IWS 031). Further, a setting change processing end command indicating that the setting change processing has ended is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (step 121 IWS 032). Then, the process proceeds to step 121IWS034.

  On the other hand, when the output signal from the door opening sensor 121IW090 is not on (N in step 121IWS025) or when the setting key 121IW051 is not on (N in step 121IWS026), the CPU 103 performs the same process as step S9. Thus, the effect control command instructing initialization is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (step S9). Then, the process proceeds to step 121IWS034.

  In the present characteristic portion 121IW, the processes of steps IWS034 to S036 are the same as the processes of steps S10 to S12 shown in FIG.

  Next, the setting confirmation process (step 121IWS019) will be described. FIG. 20A is a flowchart of the setting confirmation process (step 121IWS019).

  In the setting confirmation process, the CPU 103 first specifies the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102, and displays the specified setting value on the display monitor 121IW029 (step 121IWSA01).

  Next, the CPU 103 determines whether the output signal from the setting key 121IW051 is on (step 121IWSA02). If the setting key 121IW051 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether the output signal from the door opening sensor 121IW090 is on (step 121IWSA03). If the output signal from the door opening sensor 121IW090 is on, the process proceeds to step 121IWSA02, and the processes of step 121IWSA02 to SA03 are repeatedly executed. That is, while the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is in the open state and the setting key 121IW051 is on, the setting value is displayed on the display monitor 121IW029.

  If the output signal from the door opening sensor 121IW090 is not on, the CPU 103 executes setting confirmation error processing (step 121IWSA04). Then, it shifts to loop processing. In step 121IWSA04, for example, the CPU 103 transmits a command indicating that a setting confirmation error has occurred, and the setting control error notification is executed based on the fact that the effect control CPU 120 receives the command. Good. Further, for example, the CPU 103 may perform error notification by turning on an error LED of a substrate mounted on a game machine. Further, in the present embodiment, when the setting confirmation error processing is executed, by shifting to the loop processing, thereafter, the error state is continued until the power is turned on again, and the processing is not advanced.

  If the setting key 121IW051 is not on, the CPU 103 determines whether the output signal from the door opening sensor 121IW090 is on (step 121IWSA05). If the output signal from the door opening sensor 121IW090 is on, the process of step 121IWSA05 is repeatedly executed. If the output signal from the door opening sensor 121IW090 is not on (that is, if the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is closed), the setting confirmation process is ended.

  Next, the setting change process (step 121IWS029) will be described. FIG. 20B is a flowchart illustrating setting change processing (step 121IWS029).

  In the setting change process, the CPU 103 first specifies the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102, and displays the specified setting value on the display monitor 121IW029 (step 121IWSB01).

  Next, the CPU 103 determines whether the output signal from the setting change switch 121IW052 is on (step 121IWSB02). If the output signal from the setting change switch 121IW052 is not on, the process proceeds to step 121IWSB05. If the output signal from the setting changeover switch 121IW052 is on (Y in step 121IWSB02), the CPU 103 updates and displays the setting value displayed on the display monitor 121IW029 (step 121IWSB03). For example, when “1” is displayed as the set value on the display monitor 121IW029, the display of the display monitor 121IW029 is updated to “2”, and “2” is displayed as the set value on the display monitor 121IW029. If the display of the display monitor 121IW029 is updated to "3" and the display monitor 121IW029 displays "3" as the set value, the display of the display monitor 121IW029 may be updated and displayed to "1". In addition, the CPU 103 stores the setting value (setting value after update) displayed on the display monitor 121IW0029 in the backup area of the RAM 102 (updates and stores the setting value already stored) (step 121IWSB04).

  Next, the CPU 103 determines whether the output signal from the setting key 121IW051 is on (step 121IWSB05). If the setting key 121IW051 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether the output signal from the door opening sensor 121IW090 is on (step 121IWSB06). If the output signal from the door opening sensor 121IW090 is on, the process proceeds to step 121IWSB02, and the process of step 121IWSB02 to SB06 is repeatedly executed. That is, while the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is open and the setting key 121IW051 is on, the processing of steps 121IWSB02 to SB06 is repeatedly executed.

  If the output signal from the door opening sensor 121IW090 is not on, the CPU 103 executes setting change error processing (step 121IWSB07). Then, it shifts to loop processing. In step 121IWSB07, for example, the CPU 103 transmits a command indicating that it is a setting change error, and the setting control error notification is executed based on the fact that the effect control CPU 120 receives the command. Good. Further, for example, the CPU 103 may perform error notification by turning on an error LED of a substrate mounted on a game machine. Further, in this example, when the setting change error processing is executed, by shifting to the loop processing, thereafter, the error state is continued until the power is turned on again, and the processing is not advanced. In this case, since the flag under change in setting remains set at step 121IWS027, after the power is turned on again, the RAM clear 1 process is executed (Y at step 121IWS009, see 121IWS014), The error condition will be cleared.

  If the setting key 121IW051 is not on, the CPU 103 determines whether the output signal from the door opening sensor 121IW090 is on (step 121IWSB08). If the output signal from the door opening sensor 121IW090 is on, the process of step 121IWSB08 is repeatedly executed. If the output signal from the door opening sensor 121IW090 is not on (ie, if the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is in the closed state), the setting change processing is ended.

  FIG. 20-11 is an explanatory view of the process performed when the power is turned on. In the feature portion 121IW, as shown in FIG. 20-11, when the setting key 121IW051 is on at the time of power on (when the output signal from the door opening sensor 121IW090 is on), the clear switch is on. If so, the setting change process (step 121IWS029) is executed, and if the clear switch is off, the setting confirmation process (step 121IWS015 to S017) is executed. When the setting key 121 IW 051 is off when the power is turned on, the initialization process (step S 8) is executed if the clear switch is on, and the recovery process (step S 6) is performed if the clear switch is off. To be executed.

  Next, the display mode of the display monitor 121IW029 in the setting change process will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 20-12 (A) and FIG. 20-12 (B), when the power is turned off (turned off) by the operation of the salesclerk of the game arcade or the like, the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is When the supply is stopped, the display on the display monitor 121IW029 ends. When the big winning game is open during the big hit game or the small hit game at the timing when the power is turned off, the large winning hole is closed by stopping the supply of the power to the solenoid 82.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 20-12 (C), when the store clerk or the like in the game arcade turns on the power while operating the clear switch (Yes in step S3 of the game control main process), the setting key 121IW051 is turned on. The setting change processing is executed by the CPU 103 on the condition that the condition is true, and the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is displayed on the display monitor 121IW029.

  Thus, in the state where the setting values are displayed on the display monitor 121IW029, as shown in FIG. 20-12 (D), the CPU 103 detects the operation of the setting changeover switch 121IW052 by the store clerk or the like in the game arcade etc. The numerical values displayed on the display monitor 121IW029 are sequentially updated (for example, updated as 1.fwdarw.2.fwdarw.3.fwdarw.1... Whenever the setting switch 121IW052 is operated). Further, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 121 IW 029 is stored (updated and stored) in the backup area of the RAM 102.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 20-12 (E), the CPU 103 causes the display monitor 121IW029 to blink on and off based on the setting key 121IW051 being turned off by the operation of a store clerk or the like in the game arcade. The store clerk or the like is notified that the new setting value is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102.

  Also, when the pending storage is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102, the pending storage is cleared. When the special winning opening is closed at the timing shown in FIG. 20-12 (at timing when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off), the RAM clear process is executed when the setting change is performed. Because the memory about the big hit is erased, the big winning opening remains closed. Thereafter, the CPU 103 ends the setting change processing, and the game can be performed, that is, the variation display result, the jackpot type, the determination lottery of the variation pattern, the payout of the winning balls, and the like can be performed.

  In the setting change process in the characteristic portion 121IW, the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is displayed as an initial display displayed on the display monitor 121IW029, but the present invention is limited to this. The initial display to be displayed on the display monitor 121IW029 in the setting change process is not the one that is most disadvantageous to the player (“1” in the case of the main feature portion 121IW), or the most advantageous for the player A set value (“3” in the case of the main feature portion 121 IW) may be displayed.

  Furthermore, although the example shown in FIG. 20-12 shows the case where the set value is displayed using the first display of the four-digit display of the display monitor 121IW029 at the time of confirmation or change of the set value, For example, the setting value may be displayed using the second and subsequent displays of the display monitor 121IW029, not limited to the above aspect. Further, for example, the setting value may be displayed by performing dedicated 4-digit display on the display monitor 121IW029. In this case, for example, if the setting value is "1", four digits of "-S-1" are displayed on the display monitor 121IW029, or if the setting value is "2", "-S-2" on the display monitor 121IW029. The four digits of “−S−3” may be displayed on the display monitor 121IW029 if the set value is “3”. Further, for example, the setting values may be displayed on all four-digit displays of the display monitor 121IW029. For example, if the setting value is "1", display of four digits "1111" is performed on the display monitor 121IW029, and if the setting value is "2", display of four digits of "2222" is performed on the display monitor 121IW029 May be

(Special symbol normal processing)
Next, processing of the special symbol normal processing (step S110) in the present characterizing portion 121IW will be described. 20-13 and 20-14 are flowcharts showing special symbol normal processing (step S110) in the special symbol process processing. In the special symbol normal processing, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total number of pending storages (the total number of the first pending storage number and the second pending storage number) (step 121 IWS 101). For example, the count value of the combined pending storage number counter for counting the combined pending storage number is confirmed.

  If the total number of pending storages is not 0, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the second pending storage number is 0 (step 121 IWS 102). For example, it is checked whether the count value of the second pending storage number counter for counting the second pending storage number is 0 or not. If the second number of pending storages is not 0, CPU 103 is a special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether the special symbol process processing is performed for the first special symbol or the special symbol process processing is performed for the second special symbol) The data which shows "the 2nd" is set to (step 121 IWS103). If the second pending storage number is 0, the CPU 103 sets data indicating “first” in the special symbol pointer (step 121 IWS 104).

  By executing the processing of step 121 IWS 102 to S 104, in the present characterizing portion 121 IW, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in preference to the variable display of the first special symbol. In addition, not only such a mode, for example, the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol in accordance with the starting winning order in which the game balls have won in the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening. And may be configured to execute.

  Next, the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of pending storages = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 102 and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102 (step 121 IWS 105). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 determines each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the first number of pending storages = 1 in the first pending storage buffer. Are read out and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates "the second", the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second holding storage number = 1 in the second holding storage buffer. It is stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102.

  Then, the CPU 103 subtracts one from the count value of the pending storage number counter of the one indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 121 IWS 106). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 subtracts one from the count value of the first pending storage number counter, and for each saving area in the first pending storage buffer. Shift the content. If the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the count value of the second hold storage number counter is decremented by 1, and the contents of the respective save areas in the second hold storage buffer are shifted.

  That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 stores the storage area corresponding to the first number of pending storages = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first pending storage buffer of the RAM 102. The stored random number values are stored in the storage area corresponding to the first pending storage number = n-1. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates "the second", each stored in the storage area corresponding to the second number of pending storages = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second pending storage buffer of the RAM 102 The random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second pending storage number = n-1.

  Therefore, the order in which the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective first pending storage numbers (or the respective second pending storage numbers) are extracted is always the first pending storage number (or It agrees with the order of the 2nd pending memory number) = 1, 2, 3, and 4.

  Then, the CPU 103 reduces the value of the total number of pending storages by one. That is, the count value of the total storage reserve number counter is decremented by 1 (step 121 IWS 107). Note that the CPU 103 stores the value of the combined pending storage number counter before the count value is decremented by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 102.

  Next, the CPU 103 transmits a setting value command indicating the setting value set in the RAM 102 to the effect control board 12 (step 121 IWS 108). In the feature portion 112, as described above, the setting value command is transmitted when the setting change process is executed at the time of power on by performing the process of step 121 IWS 031. However, even after the power on, the step is performed. The setting value command is transmitted each time the variable display is started by execution of the processing of the IWS 121.

  If the same variation pattern is used to transmit different variation pattern commands for each setting value, the variation pattern commands for the total number of variation patterns × the number of setting values (3 in this example) are required. And the data capacity may increase. Therefore, for example, the setting value command is transmitted only when a specific variation pattern is used, and only variation pattern commands corresponding to a particular variation pattern may be provided with variation pattern commands for the number of setting values. Good. In this case, for example, the setting value command is transmitted only when the fluctuation pattern of normal fluctuation with the highest output frequency is used, and only fluctuation pattern commands corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of normal fluctuation are fluctuation pattern commands for the number of setting values. May be provided.

  Furthermore, in this example, the same setting value command is transmitted by the setting value command (see step 121 IWS 031) transmitted at power on and the setting value command (see step 121 IWS 108) transmitted at the start of fluctuation. It is not limited to the For example, even if the setting value command for power-on and the setting value command for fluctuation start are configured as separate commands, and different setting value commands are transmitted at power-on and fluctuation start. Good.

  Further, in this example, the case is shown where the setting value command is transmitted separately from the fluctuation pattern command at the start of fluctuation, but it is configured to transmit the rendering control command that combines the fluctuation pattern command and the setting value command. It is also good. In this case, for example, even if the variation pattern command specifies the same variation pattern A, the variation pattern command A-1 is transmitted if the setting value is “1”, and if the setting value is “2”. The variation pattern command A-2 may be transmitted, and when the setting value is "3", the variation pattern command A-3 may be transmitted.

  The game control microcomputer 100 can output the same fluctuation pattern command (for example, fluctuation pattern command A) regardless of the setting value, and depending on which setting value is on the effect control CPU 120 side. It may be configured such that which variation pattern is selected or the selection ratio thereof is made different. For example, if the setting value is 1, the variation pattern A-1 is selected or the variation pattern A-1 is selected at a high ratio, and if the setting value is 2, the variation pattern A-2 is selected or the variation pattern A-2 is high. If the setting value is 3, the variation pattern A-3 may be selected or the variation pattern A-3 may be selected at a high ratio. In this case, for example, the fluctuation patterns A-1 to A-3 may be configured to have the same fluctuation time, but differ in the presence or absence of pseudo run, the number of times of pseudo run, the presence or absence of reach, and the type. Further, in this case, for example, when the setting value command can not be received normally, the variation pattern A-1 is uniformly selected, or the selection ratio for exclusive use when the setting value command can not be received normally. The variation pattern may be selected by

  Further, in the present example, the case where the setting value command is transmitted at the start of the change is shown, but not limited to such an aspect, for example, the setting value command may be transmitted at the end of the change.

  Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a background designation command to the effect control board 12 according to the current gaming state (step 121 IWS 109). In this case, for example, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the definite variation state background designation command when it is in the definite variation state, and performs control to transmit the short time status background designation command when it is the short time condition, and is in the normal state. In this case, control is performed to transmit a normal state background designation command.

  Next, the CPU 103 reads a random number value MR1 for special image display result determination from the random number buffer area, and executes the big hit determination module. The big hit determination module compares the predetermined big hit determination value or small hit determination value (see FIG. 20-4) with the random number value MR1, and determines processing to be a big hit or a small hit if they match. It is a program to execute. That is, it is a program that executes the process of the big hit determination and the small hit determination.

  If the value of the random number MR1 does not match any of the big hit judgment values (N in step 121 IWS 110), the CPU 103 performs small hit judgment processing (step 121 IWS 111). Then, if it is determined to be a small hit (Y in step 121 IWS111), the CPU 103 sets a small hit flag indicating small hit (step 121IWS112), and shifts to step 121IWS116.

  If the value of the random number MR1 does not match either the big hit determination value or the small hit determination value (N in step 121 IWS 111), that is, if it is a loss, the process directly proceeds to step 121 IWS116.

  If the value of the random number MR1 matches any of the big hit determination values (Y in step 121 IWS 110), the CPU 103 sets a big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit (step IWS 113). Next, using the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 20-5), the CPU 103 uses the type (“big hit type A corresponding to the value corresponding to the value of the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the random number buffer area "," Big hit type B "or" big hit type C ") is determined as the type of big hit (step 121 IWS 114).

  Further, the CPU 103 sets data indicating the determined type of big hit in the big hit type buffer in the RAM 102 (step 121 IWS 115). For example, if the big hit type is "big hit type A", "01" is set as data indicating the big hit type, and if the big hit type is "big hit type B", "02" is set as data indicating the big hit type When the big hit type is "big hit type C", "03" is set as data indicating the big hit type.

  Next, the CPU 103 determines the stop symbol of the special symbol (step 121IWS116). For example, when neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, "-" which becomes an out pattern is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol. Also, for example, when the big hit flag is set, "7" which is a big hit symbol is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol. In addition, you may determine to the stop symbol of a special symbol which changes according to big hit classification. Also, for example, when the small hit flag is set, the small hit symbol "5" is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol.

  Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S111) (step 121IWS 117).

(Effect mode change process)
Next, the operation of the effect control means in the present characteristic portion 121IW will be described. 20-15 is a flowchart which shows a part of effect control main process in characteristic part 121 IW. In the main feature portion 121IW, in the effect control main process, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect mode changing process for changing the effect mode when the effect control random number updating process in step S77 is performed (step 121IWS201), and then, It returns to the process of step S73.

  The feature portion 121IW can control three types of effect modes of the effect mode A to the effect mode C, and for example, the background screen of the image display device 5 differs depending on which effect mode is controlled, The types of characters that appear in the preliminary production and reach production are different. Step 121 In the effect mode change process of IWS 201, when the predetermined effect mode change condition is satisfied, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to change the current effect mode to a different effect mode. For example, when a real time clock is mounted on the effect control board 12, the effect mode may be changed based on the predetermined date or time based on the date and time information from the real time clock. Further, for example, a lottery process based on random numbers may be executed, and the effect mode may be changed based on the fact that the effect mode is determined to be changed.

  In step 121IW201, when the effect control CPU 120 changes the effect mode, for example, a flag corresponding to the effect mode after the change may be set, and a flag corresponding to the effect mode before the change may be reset. For example, when the effect mode A is changed, the effect mode A flag may be set, and the effect mode B flag or the effect mode C flag before the change may be reset. Further, for example, when the mode is changed to the effect mode B, the effect mode B flag may be set, and the effect mode A flag or the effect mode C flag before the change may be reset. Further, for example, when the effect mode C is changed, the effect mode C flag may be set, and the effect mode A flag or the effect mode B flag before the change may be reset.

  The way of changing the effect mode may be changed in a predetermined order such as effect mode A → effect mode B → effect mode C → effect mode A → ... It may be changed at random from the modes A to C.

(Command analysis process)

  20-16 to 20-18 are flowcharts showing specific examples of the command analysis process (step S75). Although the effect control command received from the main substrate 11 is stored in the reception command buffer, in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

  In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not a reception command is stored in the command reception buffer (step 121 IWS 301). Whether or not it is stored is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where the two match each other is the case where the reception command is not stored. If the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 120 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step 121 IWS 302). Incidentally, when read out, the value of the read pointer is incremented by 2 (step 121 IWS 303). The reason for +2 is that two bytes (one command) are read at a time.

  If the received effect control command is the setting value command (step 121 IWS 304), the effect control CPU 120 stores the setting value indicated by the received setting value command in the setting value storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 121 IWS 305). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets a set value command reception flag indicating that the set value command has been normally received at least once after the game machine is powered on (step 121 IWS 306).

  In the feature portion 121IW, since the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 is not backed up by the power supply, the set value and set value command reception flag stored in the set value storage area are supplied with power to the gaming machine. Is cleared when is stopped. Therefore, when the power supply to the gaming machine is started, the process is started with no setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 122 and the setting value command reception flag also cleared. Ru. Since the effect control board 12 is activated in a state where the set value is not stored, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits the set value command even when the setting check process or the recovery process is performed. It may be configured to always transmit the setting value command when the power is turned on.

  In addition, in the feature portion 121IW, the setting value command is transmitted when the setting change process is performed after the game machine is powered on, but the setting value command is normal due to a missing command or data corruption. If it can not be received, the process of step 121 IWS 305 is not executed, and the setting value is not stored in the setting value storage area. However, in the feature portion 121IW, even if the setting value command can not be received normally when the power is turned on, the setting value command is transmitted for each variable display, so the process of step 121IWS305 is performed based on the setting value command received thereafter. The setting value can be stored in the setting value storage area.

  Also, even if the setting value command is received, it is conceivable that the setting value included in the setting value command is an abnormal value, so when the setting control command is read on the CPU 120 for effect control, It may be configured to determine whether the included set value is a normal value. For example, in the present example, the setting value is configured to be set to any value of “1” to “3”, but “5”, “10”, etc. are set and include values having no margin. If it is determined, the setting value included in the setting value command may be determined to be abnormal. In addition, for example, the effect control CPU 120 stores the setting value indicated by the received setting value command, and thereafter, when a new setting value command is received, the setting value command newly received is used. If the indicated set value does not match the previously stored set value, it may be determined that an inconsistency has occurred, and it may be determined that an abnormality has occurred. Then, even if it is determined that the setting value included in the setting value command is an abnormal value, it is also assumed that the setting value command can not be received normally, and the effect is limited according to the processing method shown in the present characteristic portion 121IW. It may be configured to

(Initial appearance setting)
In the feature control portion 12 IW, when any of the initialization designation command, the recovery command, the setting change processing end command, and the setting check processing end command is received from the main board 11 in the command analysis process on the side of the production control board 12 The control for displaying a predetermined initial appearance (specifically, a combination of decorative symbols and displayed on the image display 5 until the first variable display is started) in the image display 5 Perform (hereinafter also referred to as initial appearance effect).

  If the received effect control command is the setting change processing end command (step 121 IWS 307), the effect control CPU 120 checks whether the set value command reception flag is set (step 121 IWS 308). If the setting value command reception flag is set (that is, if the setting change process is executed and the setting value command is received normally), the effect control CPU 120 is stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 122. Based on the set value, using the initial appearance determination table, the combination of an even initial appearance (for example, "246", "224", etc.) which is a combination of an even decorative design and an odd decorative design A certain odd initial appearance (for example, "135", "113", etc.) and a special initial appearance which is a combination of decorative designs including special designs (for example, star design) are determined (step 121 IWS 309) . And it transfers to step 121 IWS314.

  FIG. 20-19 is an explanatory diagram of an example of an initial appearance determination table. Step 121 In IWS309, using the initial appearance determination table shown in FIG. 20-19 (A), a lottery process based on random numbers is performed according to the allocation of determination values corresponding to the set values stored in the set value storage area Determine the outcome. In the initial appearance determination table shown in FIG. 20-19 (A), the proportion determined in the odd initial appearance is higher in the order of the setting value “1” <“2” <“3”. Therefore, in the image display device 5 before the start of the game, if the odd initial outcome is displayed, it is an advantageous setting value as compared to the case where the setting change is performed and the even initial outcome is displayed. It is suggested that it is set to. Also, as shown in FIG. 20-19 (A), the special initial appearance may be determined only when the setting value is “3”. Therefore, in the image display device 5 before the start of the game, if the special initial outcome is displayed, it is determined that the setting change has been made and that the setting value is "3". With such a configuration, an interest can be given to the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the start of the game, and motivation can be given to play the game from the early time slot of the operating hours of the game arcade, and the interest can be enhanced.

  If the setting value command reception flag is not set (that is, the setting change process has been executed, but the setting value command can not be received normally due to a reason such as a command drop or data corruption), effect control The CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current rendering mode is the rendering mode A (step 121 IWS 310). Note that whether or not the effect mode A is set can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the effect mode A flag is set. In the case of the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 determines the initial appearance using the initial appearance determination table shown in FIG. 20-19 (A) on the assumption that the setting value is “1” (step 121 IWS 311). ). And it transfers to step 121 IWS314.

  Step 121 IWS 310 to S 311 are executed, so that the feature part 121 IW can not receive the set value command normally, and in the case of the rendering mode A, the set value which is the most disadvantageous setting. The initial appearance is determined as being "1". As shown in FIG. 20-19 (A), for the setting value “1”, the ratio determined as the odd initial appearance is the lowest, and is not determined as the special initial appearance. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the situation in which the player is discouraged by displaying odd initial appearance eyes or special initial appearance eyes despite the disadvantageous set values being set, thereby making the game interesting for the game. To prevent the decline of the

  If it is not the rendering mode A, the CPU 120 for rendering control checks whether or not the current rendering mode is the rendering mode C (step 121 IWS 312). Note that whether or not the effect mode C is set can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the effect mode C flag is set. In the case of the effect mode C, the effect control CPU 120 determines an initial outcome using the initial outcome determination table for the presentation mode C (step 121IWS 313). And it transfers to step 121 IWS314.

  20-19 (B) is an explanatory view showing an example of an initial appearance determination table for effect mode C. FIG. As shown in FIG. 20-19 (B), in the initial appearance determination table for effect mode C, the odd initial appearance is determined as compared with the case of the setting value “3” which is most advantageous for the player. The percentage is low and it can not be determined as a special initial appearance.

  Step 121 IWS 312 to S 313 is executed, so that the characteristic feature portion 121 IW sets the disadvantageous setting value in the case where the setting value command can not be received normally and the effect mode C is set. The odd initial appearance and the special initial appearance are displayed to reduce the situation of being discouraged by the player in spite of the fact that the interest in the game can be prevented from being lowered.

  Then, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to display the initial number determined in steps 121IWS309, S311, and S313 (step 121IWS314).

  On the other hand, when it is not the effect mode C (that is, when the current effect mode is the effect mode B), the effect control CPU 120 determines the initial appearance even, and the image display 5 Control to display the even-numbered initial output (step 121 IWS 315).

  Step 121 IWS 315 causes the feature part 121 IW to display the even-numbered initial appearances uniformly when the setting value command can not be received normally and the effect mode B is in effect. By this, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged by displaying odd initial appearance or special initial appearance despite the setting value being disadvantageous, and to prevent deterioration of interest in the game. I have to.

  Even when the setting value command can not be received normally in the effect mode B, the odd initial appearance symbol may be determined at a low rate. In this case, for example, a table is used in which the determination ratio of the odd initial appearance symbol is set lower than the setting value “1” of the initial appearance determination table shown in FIG. You may comprise so that an eye design may be determined.

  In this example, even when the setting value command can not be received normally and the effect mode B is displayed, the even initial appearance is displayed uniformly, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. . For example, when the setting value command can not be received normally and the effect mode B is set, when the setting value command can not be received normally, such as a combination of symbols “???” as the initial appearance. It may be configured to display a dedicated initial score. As such, any combination of symbols that do not indicate setting values at all in any form may be displayed as the initial appearance.

  In addition, the process when the setting value command can not be received normally (or when the setting value can not be stored normally) is not limited to that shown in this example. For example, when it is determined as N in step 121 IWS 308, the setting value “1” may be stored as a default in the setting value storage area to determine the initial appearance. Further, for example, a dedicated setting value (for example, setting value “4”) indicating that the setting value command could not be received normally is stored in the setting value storage area to determine the initial appearance. It is also good.

  If the received effect control command is any of the initialization designating command, the command at the time of recovery, and the setting confirmation process end command (step 121 IWS 316), that is, if the setting change process is not executed, the effect control CPU 120 The initial appearance is set to the even initial appearance, and control is performed to display the even initial appearance in the image display 5 (step 121 IWS 317). In the present characteristic portion 121IW, when the setting change process is not executed, the initial appearance is determined to the even initial appearance and is not determined to the odd initial appearance, but the even initial appearance is selected by the lottery. It may be determined to be either the eye or the odd initial appearance. In this case, the ratio determined in accordance with the set value may be different.

  If the received effect control command is a RAM abnormal error notification command (step 121 IWS 318), the effect control CPU 120 executes a RAM error notification (step 121 IWS 319). For example, the effect control CPU 120 displays characters such as "RAM error abnormality is occurring" on the image display device 5, or outputs sound or error sound indicating RAM error abnormality from the speakers 8L and 8R. And controls the game effect lamp 9 and the LED to emit light with a predetermined error pattern. In this case, when the RAM error abnormality notification is performed, the speakers 8L, 8R output the sound of the maximum volume sound or an error sound, or the gaming effect lamp 9 or LED emits light at maximum brightness (for example, in the case of full color LED) Is desirable to emit white light).

  If the received effect control command is a change pattern command (effect control command specifying a change pattern) (step 121 IWS 320), the effect control CPU 120 stores the change pattern command received in the RAM. It stores in the area (step 121 IWS 321). Then, the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step 121IWS 322).

  If the received effect control command is a display result designation command (whether or not to be a big hit, whether it is a small hit or not, a big hit type, a small hit type, a production control command) (step 121 IWS 323), for production control The CPU 120 stores the received display result designation command in the display result designation command storage area formed in the RAM (step 121 IWS 324).

  If the received effect control command is a symbol determination designating command (a effect control command designating that the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is determined and displayed) (step 121 IWS 325), the effect control CPU 120 sets a determination command reception flag ( Step 121 IWS 326).

  If the received effect control command is a big hit start designation command (show control command specifying start of big hit game) (step 121 IWS 327), the CPU for effect control 120 sets a big hit start designation command reception flag (step 121 IWS 328).

  If the received effect control command is a big hit end designation command (effect control command specifying end of big hit game) (step 121 IWS 329), the CPU for effect control 120 sets a big hit end designated command reception flag (step 121 IWS 330).

  Whether the received effect control command is a big hit determined whether it is read pre-read in the symbol selection command (see the start winning determination process (see step S101) or whether it will be a small hit, a big hit type, a small hit type judgment result is specified If it is an effect control command to be executed (step 121 IWS 331), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received symbol designation command in the first free storage area of the start winning command storage area formed in the RAM ( Step 121 IWS 332).

  If the received effect control command is a fluctuation category command (effect control command specifying the judgment result of the fluctuation category (fluctuation pattern type or fluctuation pattern) pre-read judged in the start winning judgment process (see step S101) (step 121 IWS 333) And effect control CPU 120 stores the received variation category command in the storage area where the latest symbol designation command is stored among the storage areas of the start winning command storage area formed in the RAM (step 121 IWS 334).

  If the received effect control command is the first hold memory number addition designation command (step 121 IWS 335), the effect control CPU 120 executes the received first hold memory number addition designation command in the start winning prize command formed in the RAM. Among the storage areas of the storage area, the latest symbol designation command and variation category command are stored in the storage area where the command is stored (step 121 IWS 336). Further, the effect control CPU 120 increases the hold display by one in the first hold storage display area of the image display device 5, and updates the first hold storage number display (step 121IWS 337). Further, the effect control CPU 120 adds one to the value of the first pending storage number stored in the first pending storage number storage area (step 121 IWS 338).

  If the received effect control command is the second hold memory number addition designation command (step 121 IWS 339), the effect control CPU 120 executes the received second hold memory number addition designation command in the start winning combination command formed in the RAM. Among the storage areas of the storage area, it is stored in the storage area in which the latest symbol designation command and variation category command are stored (step 121 IWS 340). Further, the effect control CPU 120 increases the hold display by one in the second hold storage display area of the image display device 5 and updates the second hold storage number display (step 121 IWS 341). Further, the effect control CPU 120 adds one to the value of the second hold storage number stored in the second hold storage number storage area (step 121 IWS 342).

  If the received effect control command is the first pending storage number subtraction designation command (step 121IWS343), the effect control CPU 120 erases one pending display in the first pending storage display area of the image display device 5, and the remaining The pending indication is shifted one by one to update the first pending storage number indication (step 121 IWS 344). Further, the effect control CPU 120 subtracts one from the value of the first pending storage number stored in the first pending storage number saving area (step 121 IWS 345).

  If the received effect control command is the second hold storage number subtraction designation command (step 121IWS346), the effect control CPU 120 erases one hold display in the second hold storage display area of the image display device 5, and the remaining The pending indication is shifted one by one to update the second pending storage number indication (step 121 IWS 347). Further, the effect control CPU 120 subtracts one from the value of the second hold storage number stored in the second hold storage number storage area (step 121 IWS 348).

  If the received effect control command is another command, the effect control CPU 120 stores the received effect control command, or sets a flag according to the received effect control command (step 121 IWS 349). Then, the process proceeds to step 121IWS301.

  In the feature portion 121IW, when the setting change process is not executed when the power is turned on, the odd initial outcome is not displayed, but the odd initial outcome may be displayed. Good. Also in this case, the ratio determined at the odd initial appearance may be different according to the set value (that is, the suggestion of the set value may be performed).

  Also, for example, instead of or in addition to odd initial appearance or even initial appearance, an initial appearance that denies the possibility of being a specific set value (for example, the possibility of being set value 1 is denied, setting A value 2 or a setting value 3 may be determined), an initial appearance number determining that the specific setting value is determined, or the like may be provided, and may be displayed according to the setting value. For example, in the case of the setting value 1, by not determining the specific initial appearance, when the specific initial appearance is displayed, the possibility of being the setting value 1 is negated, and the setting value 2 or It is determined that the setting value is 3. Also, for example, by setting the value to the specific initial appearance only in the case of the setting value 3, when the specific initial appearance is displayed, the setting value 3 is determined. . In addition, at the time of initial outcome determination, one of these initial outcomes may be determined by lottery. In this case, the ratio determined in accordance with the set value may be different.

(Setting indication production)
The main feature part 121IW is configured to be able to change the set value, and as a set suggestion effect that suggests the set value, a pre-game suggestion effect to be executed before the start of the game, the above-mentioned initial appearance effect, and , During the variation display of the decoration pattern) configuration suggestion by the decision trend of the above-mentioned during the game suggestion effect or the variation pattern described above, it is possible to execute the big hit during the big hit during the big hit (for example, during the big hit game) It is done. In the main feature portion 121IW, it is possible to execute the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect and the big hit suggestion effect by a plurality of types of effect modes each having different suggestion reliability, for example, a type of setting suggestion effect The reliability of the suggestion may be different for each. For example, it may be made to increase the reliability of the suggestion in the order of the pre-game suggestion effect> big-hit suggestion effect> in-game suggestion effect or the pre-game suggestion effect> in-game suggestion effect> big-hit suggestion effect. In-game suggestion effect> Big-hit suggestion effect> In order of pre-game suggestion effect, or in a big-hit suggestion effect> In-game suggestion effect> In-game suggestion effect In the order of suggestion reliability may be increased. Further, the execution ratio of each setting suggestion effect may be settable. For example, the manager of the gaming machine does not execute some or all of the setting suggestion effects (for example, a pre-game indication effect or an initial appearance effect suggesting that a setting change has been made), or an execution ratio The setting may be changed so as to lower (or raise). For example, the setting screen is displayed after the power is turned on, and the setting regarding the setting suggestion effect is performed by operating the operating means such as the push button 31B or the operating means such as a switch provided inside the gaming machine (only the administrator can operate). May be changed.

(Pre-reading notice setting process)
In addition, in the main feature portion 121 IW, in addition to the initial appearance effect, the pre-game indication effect, the in-game indication effect, and the big hit indication effect, the pre-reading zone effect or the reach indication effect, the presentation stage as an effect capable of suggesting setting values. It is possible to execute an effect by changing the.

  FIG. 20C is a flowchart of the prefetch advance notice setting process (step S161). In the advance notice setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not a command for one set of start winning is newly received (step 121 IWS 401). Specifically, one set of symbol designation command, variation category command, and pending storage number addition designation command (first pending storage number addition designation command or second pending storage number addition designation command) are included in the start winning command storage area. It can be confirmed by determining whether it is newly stored. If one set of start winning combination commands has not been received anew, the process ends.

  If one set of start winning winning command is newly received, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the first starting winning winning opening has newly occurred (step 121 IWS 402). . It should be noted that, specifically, whether or not the start winning at the first start winning opening has occurred is whether or not the newly received pending storage count addition designation command is the first pending storage count addition designation command. It can be confirmed by determining the If the start winning to the first start winning opening has not occurred (that is, if the starting winning to the second start winning opening has occurred), the processing ends.

  If the start winning to the first start winning opening has occurred, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether the first number of pending storages is two or more (step 121 IWS 403). If the first pending storage number is not 2 or more (that is, if the first pending storage number is 1), the process ends.

  In this example, by performing the processing of steps IWS402 and S403, the pre-reading zone effect may be executed only when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed twice or more. Although the case where it shows is shown, it is not restricted to such an aspect. For example, even if the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the pre-reading zone effect can be configured to be executable, or the pre-reading zone effect is executed even if only one variable display is performed after the start winning. It may be configured as possible.

  If the first number of pending storages is two or more, the CPU for effect control 120 checks whether or not the pre-reading zone effect under-execution flag indicating that the pre-reading zone effect is being executed is set (step 121 IWS 404). If the pre-reading zone effect executing flag is set (that is, if the pre-reading zone effect is already being executed), the process ends. Step 121 By executing the process of IWS 404, in this example, when the prefetch zone effect is already being executed, the prefetch zone effect is not determined in duplicate.

  If the pre-reading zone effect executing flag is not set (that is, if the pre-reading zone effect is not being executed), the effect control CPU 120 selects one of the symbol designation commands stored in the start winning command storage area. All symbol designation commands (all symbol designation commands stored in association with the first reserved memory number addition designation command) based on the winning on the start winning opening are extracted (step 121 IWS 405).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not there is an extracted symbol designating command indicating that the prefetch determination result is a big hit (step 121 IWS 406). If there is a big hit (that is, if there is a big hit in the first pending storage), the effect control CPU 120 is a table for determining the presence or absence of the pre-reading zone effect, the pre-reading zone for the big hit An effect determination table is selected (step 121 IWS 407). If there is nothing to be a big hit (that is, there is nothing to be a big hit in the first reserved memory), the effect control CPU 120 is a table for determining presence or absence of pre-reading zone effect, pre-reading zone for losing An effect determination table is selected (step 121 IWS 408). Then, the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on random numbers using the selected prefetch zone effect determination table, and determines the presence or absence of the prefetch zone effect (step 121 IWS 409).

  FIGS. 20-21 is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a pre-reading zone production | presentation determination table. Among these, FIG. 20A (A) shows a specific example of the pre-reading zone effect determination table for the big hit. Moreover, FIG. 20-21 (B) has shown the specific example of the pre-reading zone effect determination table for off. As shown in FIG. 20-21, in this example, if there is a big hit in the first pending storage, it is decided to execute the prefetch zone effect with a probability of 70%, and the first pending storage If there is nothing to be a big hit among them, it is decided to execute the prefetch zone effect with a probability of 1%.

  In this example, although the case where the execution ratio of the pre-reading zone effect is changed according to whether or not it is a big hit, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the execution ratio of the pre-reading zone effect may be varied according to the presence or the type of the super reach. Further, for example, the execution ratio of the pre-reading zone effect may be varied according to the presence or absence of the pseudo run and the pseudo run number.

  If it is decided to execute the pre-reading zone effect (Y in step 121 IWS 410), the effect control CPU 120 sets a pre-reading zone effect executing flag (step 121 IWS 411). Further, the effect control CPU 120 clears the value of the pre-reading zone effect number counter for counting the number of times the pre-reading zone effect is executed (step 121IWS412). In addition, the pre-reading zone effect under-execution flag set in step 121IWS411 is reset when a big hit occurs, and pre-reading zone effect is ended. Further, in this example, when the big hit does not occur even if the variable display of 4 times is executed (when the value of the pre-reading zone effect frequency counter becomes 4), when the variable display is ended It is assumed that the pre-reading zone effect executing flag is reset to, and the pre-reading zone effect is ended.

  By performing the above-described processing, in the feature portion 121IW, the execution of the pre-reading zone effect may be determined when a new start winning combination occurs. Then, when execution of the pre-reading zone effect is determined, pre-reading zone effect is started when the first variable display is started, and when the big hit occurs in the second to fourth variable display, the set value “ It is suggested that it is 1 "-" 3 ".

  In this example, although the case of determining the presence or absence of the pre-reading zone effect based on the pre-reading determination result indicated by the symbol designation command is shown, the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the presence or absence of pre-reading zone effect may be determined based on the pre-reading determination result (for example, whether it becomes super reach) indicated by the change category command.

  Further, in this example, when execution of the pre-reading zone effect is determined, the case is described where the pre-reading zone effect is started when the first variable display is uniformly started. I can not. For example, a plurality of timings may be provided as start timings of the pre-reading zone effect. In this case, for example, when the execution of the pre-reading zone effect is determined in the pre-reading notice setting process, it is further determined whether the start timing of the pre-reading zone effect is the first fluctuation, the second fluctuation, or the third fluctuation. The pre-reading zone effect may be started from the determined and determined start timing.

(Variable display start waiting process)
FIG. 20-22 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a variable display start waiting process. In the variable display start waiting process, the CPU for effect control 120 checks whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step 121 IWS 501).

  When the variation pattern command reception flag is set, the CPU for effect control 120 performs control to end the demonstration operation for waiting for the customer (step 121 IWS 502, step 121 IWS 503). Then, the variation pattern command reception flag is reset (step 121IWS504), and the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1" (step 121IWS505), and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

  If the variation pattern command reception flag is not set, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the customer waiting demonstration effect (N in step 121 IWS 506), whether the time measurement result by the time counting means matches the predetermined condition or not It is confirmed (step 121 IWS 507). Step 121 IWS 507 determines that the predetermined condition is met, for example, when the timer (set, for example, for 30 seconds) set when the previous variable display (display result “losing”) is finished out. In addition, it is determined that the predetermined condition is met also when the timer is not set (that is, when the variable display is not executed even once after power on and before the start of the game). That is, when the variable display is not performed and a predetermined period has passed (and not controlled to the big hit gaming state) or before the start of the game, the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the customer waiting demonstration effect is produced by the processing described later. Will be executed.

  If the clocking result by the clocking means matches the predetermined condition, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the number of fluctuations after power-on is zero (step 121 IWS 508). That is, in step 121 IWS 508, it is confirmed whether the game has not been started yet.

  If the number of changes after power-on is zero, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether the set value command reception flag is set (step 121 IWS 509). If the set value command reception flag is set (that is, if the set value command is normally received), the effect control CPU 120 determines the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 122, Based on the pre-game suggestion effect determination table, the presence or absence of the pre-game suggestion effect and the effect mode in the case of execution are determined according to the set value (step 121 IWS 510). And it transfers to step 121 IWS515.

  In the present feature portion 121IW, when the customer waiting demo effect of the aspect including the pre-game suggestion effect of the first effect aspect is executed, the decoration lamp becomes the first special color (blue) different from the normal color (for example, white) When the customer waiting demo effect of the aspect including the pre-game suggestion effect of the second production mode is controlled and executed, the decoration lamp is controlled to the second special color (red), and the pre-game suggestion effect of the third production mode is The decoration lamp is controlled to the third special color (rainbow color) when the customer demonstration effect including the aspect is executed.

  FIG. 20-23 is an explanatory drawing showing an example of the pre-game suggestion effect determination table. In step 121 IWS 510, using the pre-game suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 20-23 (A), the lottery process based on random numbers is performed according to the allocation of the determination value corresponding to the setting value stored in the setting value storage area, The presence or absence of the execution of the pre-game suggestion effect and the effect mode are determined. In the pre-game suggestion effect determination table of FIG. 20-23 (A), the determination values are assigned such that the ratio at which the pre-game suggestion effect is performed becomes higher in the order of the setting value “1” <“2” <“3” It is done. Further, the determination values are assigned such that the proportion determined in the second effect mode in the order of the setting values “1” <“2” <“3” is high. With such a configuration, it is suggested that the pre-game suggestion effect is executed, and that the advantageous setting value is suggested by being executed by the second effect mode rather than the first effect mode. Become. In addition, by performing the pre-game suggestion effect, it is suggested that the setting change is performed when the power is turned on. Moreover, as shown to FIG. 20-23 (A), it may be determined to a 3rd presentation mode, only when it is setting value "3." Therefore, it is determined that the setting change has been made and that the setting value is "3" by the pre-game suggestion effect being executed by the third effect mode.

  If the setting value command reception flag is not set (that is, the setting change process has been executed, but the setting value command can not be received normally due to a reason such as a command drop or data corruption), effect control The CPU 120 confirms whether the current effect mode is the effect mode A (step 121 IWS 511). Note that whether or not the effect mode A is set can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the effect mode A flag is set. In the case of the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 assumes that the setting value is “1”, and the presence or absence of the pre-game indication effect using the pre-game indication effect determination table shown in FIG. 20-23 (A) And the presentation mode is determined (step 121 IWS 512). And it transfers to step 121 IWS515.

  By executing the processing of step 121 IWS 511 to S 512, the present characteristic portion 121 IW is the case where the setting value command can not be received normally, and in the case of the effect mode A, the setting value being the most disadvantageous setting. The presence or absence of a pre-game suggestion effect and the presentation mode are determined as being "1". As shown in FIG. 20-23 (A), the ratio determined as the second effect mode is the lowest with respect to the setting value “1”, and is not determined as the third effect mode. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the situation in which the pre-game suggestion effect is executed by the second effect mode and the third effect mode even though the disadvantageous setting value is set, and the player is discouraged instead. To prevent the decline in interest for the game.

  If the effect mode A is not in effect, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether the current effect mode is the effect mode C (step 121 IWS 513). Note that whether or not the effect mode C is set can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the effect mode C flag is set. In the case of the effect mode C, the effect control CPU 120 determines the presence / absence of execution of the effect before the game and the effect mode by using the pre-game indication effect determination table for the effect mode C (step 121 IWS 514). And it transfers to step 121 IWS515.

  20-23 (B) is an explanatory view showing an example of a pre-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C. FIG. As shown in FIG. 20-23 (B), in the pre-game suggestion effect determination table for effect mode C, it is determined to execute the pre-game suggestion effect in comparison with the setting value “2” or “3”. The ratio itself is low, the ratio determined to be the first effect mode or the second effect mode is low, and it is not determined to be the third effect mode.

  By performing the processing of step 121 IWS 513 to S 514, in the present characteristic portion 121 IW, in the case where the setting value command can not be received normally and the effect mode C is set, the disadvantageous setting value is set. Although the suggestion effect before game is executed by the second effect mode and the third effect mode regardless of the situation, the situation where the player is disappointed rather than being reduced can be reduced, and a decrease in interest for the game can be prevented.

  Then, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to execute a customer waiting demonstration effect of an aspect including the pre-game suggestion effect determined in step 121 IWS 510, S512, S514 (step 121 IWS 515). Thereafter, the variable display start waiting process is ended.

  On the other hand, when it is not the effect mode C (that is, when the current effect mode is the effect mode B), the effect control CPU 120 proceeds to step 121IWS 516 as it is. That is, in the case of the effect mode B, it is limited so as not to execute the pre-game indication effect.

  By performing the process of step 121 IWS 513, the feature part 121 IW does not normally receive the set value command, and when the effect mode B is in effect, by not executing the pre-game suggestion effect, It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest for the game by reducing the situation in which the pre-game suggestion effect is executed and the player is disappointed instead of being set despite the disadvantageous set value.

  Even in the case where the setting value command can not be normally received in the effect mode B, the pre-game suggestion effect may be executable at a low rate. In this case, for example, using the table in which the execution ratio of the pre-game suggestion effect is set to be lower than the setting value “1” of the pre-game suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. You may comprise so that the presence or absence and kind of suggestion effects may be determined.

  In addition, it is not restricted to the example shown to FIG. 20-23 (A), and the ratio by which it is performed differs according to a setting value only in the specific presentation mode (for example, 2nd presentation mode) among several presentation modes You may

  Further, for example, when a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) of the plurality of effect modes is executed, the possibility of being a specific set value may be denied. For example, in the case of the setting value 1, setting is not performed when a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed by preventing the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) from being determined. The possibility of being the value 1 is negated, and it is determined that the setting value 2 or the setting value 3 is established. In addition, when a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed, it may be determined that it is a specific set value. For example, when a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed by setting a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) only in the case of the setting value 3, It is determined that the setting value is 3.

  In the present feature portion 121IW, according to the set value, it is possible to execute the pre-game suggestion effect at a different ratio, but this is the pre-game suggestion effect (the first production mode, the second production mode and the second 3) The execution ratio of the three rendering modes is different, the execution ratio of the first rendering mode, the second rendering mode and the third rendering mode is different depending on the setting value, and only the specific rendering mode is changing according to the setting value It is a concept that includes different execution rates.

  In the present characteristic portion 121IW, the setting change is not performed when the power is turned on, and when the set value command is not received yet, the pre-game suggestion effect is not executed. Not only when the setting change is not performed, the pre-game suggestion effect may be executable. In this case, the presence / absence of the pre-game suggestion effect may be determined at different rates depending on when the setting change is performed and when the setting change is not performed, and the effect mode in the case of execution may be determined.

  For example, FIG. 20-23 (C) is a pre-game suggestion effect determination table used when receiving a recovery command. Comparing the pre-game suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 20-23 (A) with the pre-game suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 20-23 (C), when the recovery command is received, that is, the setting change When not being performed, the ratio at which the pre-game suggestion effect is performed is lower than when the setting change is performed, and the difference in the execution ratio between the setting values is also smaller. By doing this, the reliability of the suggestion by the pre-game suggestion effect can be made different between when the setting change is made and when it is not made.

  If the number of changes after the power is turned on is not zero, the CPU 120 performs control for executing a customer waiting demonstration effect of an aspect including execution history information of setting suggestion effects (except for pre-game suggestion effects) (step 121 IWS 516). Thereafter, the variable display start waiting process is ended.

  Step 121 When the processing of IWS 516 is executed, for example, an execution history showing the number of times of execution of setting suggestion effects (in-game indication effects or suggestion effects during big hit) and execution contents (effect mode at the time of execution) in the image display device 5 A demonstration for waiting for a customer in a mode in which information is displayed is performed. In addition, if processing of step 121IWS516 is performed, customer waiting de-representation will be performed, and if predetermined operation (for example, operation of stick controller 31A or push button 31B) is performed during execution of the said customer waiting de tribute presentation, The execution history information of the setting suggestion effect may be displayed on the image display device 5. In addition, on the side of the effect control board 12, the number of times of execution and execution content (effect mode at the time of execution) of setting indication effects (initial appearance effect, pre-game indication effect, in-game indication effect, big hit indication effect etc) are shown Information may be stored, and an effect of inferring a setting value from the information and notifying it may be executable. Note that this effect is to notify the setting expectation degree (or the estimated value to be estimated) calculated based on a predetermined reference from the execution situation of the setting suggestion effect, and not to notify the actual setting value .

  In the present feature portion 121 IW, the processing before step S 121 IWS 508 to 121 IWS 515 executes the pre-game suggestion effect only before the game is started. In addition, although the execution history information of the setting suggestion effect is indicated during the customer waiting demonstration effect by the processing of the step 121 IWS 516, the information on the pre-game suggestion effect is excluded. With such a configuration, an interest can be given to the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the start of the game, and motivation can be given to play the game from an early time slot of the operating hours of the game arcade, and the interest can be enhanced. . In addition to the example of the main feature portion 121IW, for example, a pre-game suggestion effect is executed only in a predetermined time slot (for example, from 9 am to 11 am) using a real time clock or the like. It is also good. In addition, the execution history information of the setting indication effect may not include information on the in-game indication effect during the special period.

  In addition to the configuration of the feature portion 121IW, the number of executions and contents of the setting suggestion effect are accumulated as execution history information, and a two-dimensional code including execution history information is displayed on the image display 5 at the end of the game. It may be configured to In addition, when the player captures a two-dimensional code displayed on the gaming machine using a portable terminal such as a mobile phone with a camera function and transmits it to a web server on the Internet, the web server is based on the received information. A game history of the player may be managed, and a process of giving a predetermined benefit may be performed according to the game history. Further, the execution history information may be acquired by the player accessing the Web server (or analyzing the two-dimensional code) using the portable terminal, and may be displayed on the display device provided in the portable terminal. In addition, a setting suggestion image suggesting a setting value may be displayed on a display device included in the portable terminal by the player reading a two-dimensional code including execution history information using the portable terminal. For example, a setting value estimated on the basis of a predetermined standard from the execution history information is calculated, and a setting suggestion image suggesting the calculated setting value (which is only estimation and different from the actual setting value) is displayed. May be

(Variable display start setting process)
20-24 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first reads a fluctuation pattern command from the fluctuation pattern command storage area (step 121IWS601). Next, the effect control CPU 120 displays the decorative pattern display result (stop) according to the variation pattern command read in step 121 IWS601 and the data stored in the display result specification command storage area (that is, the received display result specification command) The symbol) is determined (step 121 IWS 602). That is, by the effect control CPU 120 executing the process of step 121 IWS 602, the display result of the variable display of the identification information (stop of the decorative pattern) according to the variable display pattern (variation pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determination means Display result determining means for determining the symbol) is realized. The effect control CPU 120 stores data indicating the determined stop symbol of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area. In step 121 IWS 602, CPU 120 for effect control may determine whether or not a big hit based on the received fluctuation pattern command, and may decide to stop the decorative symbol based only on the fluctuation pattern command. .

  In step 121 IWS 602, for example, when the received display result designation command indicates a probability variation big hit, the effect control CPU 120 determines a combination of decorative symbols in which three symbols are aligned with the same odd symbol as a stop symbol. Also, for example, when the received display result designation command indicates a large hit (non-probable variation big hit), the effect control CPU 120 determines a combination of decorative symbols in which three symbols are aligned with the same even symbol as a stop symbol. Do.

  When the received display result designation command indicates a small hit, the effect control CPU 120 determines the combination of the small hit symbols according to the small hit type designated by the display result designation command. . In this example, a combination of "135" is determined as a small hit symbol in the case of small hit type A, and a combination of "357" is determined as a small hit symbol in the case of small hit type B, small hit In the case of type C, a combination of "579" is determined as a small hit symbol.

  In addition, when the received display result designating command indicates detachment, a combination of decorative symbols other than the above is determined. However, when it is accompanied by the reach effect, the combination of the decorative designs in which the two left and right designs are aligned is determined.

  In addition, when pseudo run is designated by the change pattern command, CPU120 for production control is the chance eye design (for example, "223" or "445" etc.) as temporary stop symbol of pseudo run in step 121 IWS602. Also, although it is not a reach, a combination of a big hit symbol and a symbol whose one symbol is off is also determined.

  For example, the effect control CPU 120 extracts a random number for determining a stop symbol, and uses the stop symbol determination table in which the data indicating the combination of the decorative symbols and the numerical value are associated, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol decide. That is, the stop symbol is determined by selecting the data indicating the combination of the decorative symbols corresponding to the numerical value matching the extracted random number.

  Next, the CPU 120 for effect control checks whether or not the variable display to be started this time includes super reach (step 121 IWS 603). In addition, it can be specifically determined by confirming the fluctuation pattern designated by the fluctuation pattern command read in step 121 IWS 601 whether or not it is the fluctuation display including the super reach. If it is a variable display including a super reach, the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on random numbers using a super reach type determination table for determining the type of super reach, and develops while displaying a decorative pattern variation. The type of super reach to be made is determined (step 121 IWS 604).

  FIG. 20-25 is an explanatory drawing showing a specific example of the super reach type determination table. Among these, FIG. 20-25 (A) shows a specific example of the super reach type determination table selected when the setting value is “1”. Moreover, FIG. 20-25 (B) has shown the specific example of the super reach kind determination table selected when it is setting value "2". Moreover, FIG. 20-25 (C) has shown the specific example of the super reach kind determination table selected when it is setting value "3."

  In this example, when the super reach is executed during the change display of the decorative symbol, it is possible to develop into four types of super reach from super reach A to D. In the present example, as shown in FIG. 20-25 (A), in the case where the setting value is “1”, the ratio of determining to execute the super reach B is the highest. Further, as shown in FIG. 20-25 (B), in the case of the setting value “2”, the ratio of determining to execute the super reach C is the highest. Further, as shown in FIG. 20-25 (C), in the case of the set value “3”, the ratio of determining to execute the super reach D is the highest.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines an icon pattern to be displayed during super reach according to the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 122 (step 121 IWS 605). In step 121 IWS 605, CPU 120 for effect control selects an icon pattern determination table for determining an icon pattern according to the setting value, performs lottery processing based on random numbers using the selected icon pattern determination table, and executes icon pattern Decide.

  FIGS. 20-26 and 20-27 are explanatory diagrams showing a specific example of the icon pattern determination table. Among these, FIG. 20A (A) shows a specific example of the icon pattern determination table selected when the setting value is “1”. Also, FIG. 20-26 (B) shows a specific example of the icon pattern determination table selected when the setting value is “2”. FIG. 20C shows a specific example of the icon pattern determination table selected in the case of the setting value “3”.

  In this example, the panel images A to D corresponding to the super reach A to D overlap the head of the panel image A corresponding to the super reach A at the start timing of the super reach during the variation display of the decorative design. Is displayed. Then, in accordance with the operation of the push button 31B by the player, the panel images corresponding to the super reach A are erased in order, and the effect of developing to a type of super reach corresponding to the panel image displayed at the top finally Is executed.

  In this example, when it is decided to execute the super reach A, the panel image is not erased even if the push button 31B is operated, and the panel image corresponding to the super reach A is displayed at the top. It does not change from the state. When it is determined that the super reach B is to be executed, the panel image is erased even if the push button 31B is operated when the panel image corresponding to the super reach B is displayed at the top. In addition, the panel image corresponding to Super Reach B remains unchanged at the top. When it is determined that the super reach C is to be executed, when the panel image corresponding to the super reach C is displayed at the top, the panel image is erased even if the push button 31B is operated any more. In addition, the panel image corresponding to Super Reach C remains unchanged at the top.

  Further, in this example, an icon image may be displayed in panel images B to D corresponding to super reach B to D, respectively, and an icon image is displayed on the panel image that was finally displayed at the top. The suggestion during the reach is executed by suggesting the current setting value.

  As shown in FIGS. 20-26 and 20-27, in this example, there are nine types of icon patterns, icon patterns 1-9. The icon pattern 1 is a pattern in which no icon image is displayed on any of the panel images B to D. Therefore, the decision to the icon pattern 1 means that it is decided not to execute the suggestion effect during the reach. Further, the icon pattern 2 is a pattern in which the icon image “●” is displayed in any of the panel images B to D. The icon pattern 3 is a pattern in which the icon image “●” is displayed on the panel images B to C, and the icon image “▲” is displayed on the panel image D. The icon pattern 4 is a pattern in which the icon image “●” is displayed on the panel image B and the icon image “▲” is displayed on the panel images C to D. The icon pattern 5 is a pattern in which the icon image “●” is displayed on the panel image B, the icon image “▲” is displayed on the panel image C, and the icon image “★” is displayed on the panel image D. In addition, the icon pattern 6 is a pattern in which the icon image “▲” is displayed on any of the panel images B to D. The icon pattern 7 is a pattern in which the icon image “▲” is displayed on the panel images B to C, and the icon image “★” is displayed on the panel image D. The icon pattern 8 is a pattern in which the icon image “▲” is displayed on the panel image B and the icon image “★” is displayed on the panel images C to D. Also, the icon pattern 8 is a pattern in which the icon image “★” is displayed in any of the panel images B to D.

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 20-26 (A), when the setting value is “1”, the selection ratio of the icon patterns 2 to 5 in which the icon image “●” is displayed on the panel image B is compared. High (in the case of a big hit, it is selected with a total probability of 60%, and in the case of an outs, it is selected with a total probability of 50%). Therefore, in the present example, when the setting value is “1”, the execution ratio of the super reach B is high, so if the icon image “●” is displayed on the panel B displayed at the top finally The probability that the setting value is “1” is high, and the setting value “1” is suggested.

  Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 20-26 (B), when the setting value is “2”, the selection ratio of the icon patterns 4 to 7 in which the icon image “▲” is displayed on the panel image C Is relatively high (in the case of a big hit, it is selected with a total probability of 60%, and in the case of an outset it is selected with a total probability of 50%). Therefore, in the present example, when the setting value is “2”, the execution ratio of the super reach C is high, so if the icon image “▲” is displayed on the panel C finally displayed at the top The probability that the setting value is “2” is high, and the setting value “2” is suggested.

  Also, in this example, as shown in FIG. 20-27 (C), when the setting value is “3”, the icon image “★” is displayed on the panel image D. The selection rate is relatively high (in the case of a big hit, a total of 60% of the probability is selected, and in the case of an outlier, a total of 50% of the probability of selection). Therefore, in the present example, when the setting value is “3”, the execution ratio of the super reach D is high, so if the icon image “★” is displayed on the panel D finally displayed at the top The probability that the setting value is "3" is high, and the setting value "3" is suggested.

  Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 20-26 (A), when the icon pattern 2 is selected in the case where the setting value is “1”, it is decided that a big hit is made. Therefore, for a combination of a specific setting value and an icon pattern (in this example, a combination of setting value “1” and icon pattern 2), it is possible to enhance the expectation for a big hit. In addition to the mode shown in the present example, for example, when the setting value is “1”, even if it is the case of the detachment, the icon pattern 2 may be selected at a low rate. May be

  Further, in the present example, as shown in FIGS. 20-26 (A) and (B), when the setting value is “1” or “2”, the ratio of selecting the icon pattern 9 is extremely as 1%. When the setting value is "3", as shown in FIG. 20-27 (C), the percentage at which the icon pattern 9 is selected is relatively high (in the case of a big hit, it has a probability of 30%). In the case of outliers, it is selected with a probability of 20%). Therefore, in the present example, when the icon image “★” is displayed on all of the panel images B to D in the super reach, the expectation for the setting value “3” is high. Therefore, for a combination of a specific setting value and an icon pattern (in this example, a combination of setting value “3” and icon pattern 9), the sense of expectation for the setting value of high degree of interest can be enhanced. In addition to the aspect shown in this example, for example, when the icon pattern 9 is selected, it may be configured to determine that the setting value is "3".

  In this example, the setting value "3" is used for the combination of the setting value "3" and the icon pattern 9 as an example of the case where the expectation for the setting value differs depending on the combination of a specific setting value and the icon pattern. Although the case where the degree of expectation for the case becomes high is shown, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, a combination of a set value “1” and an icon pattern, where the expectation for the set value “1” is high, or a combination of a set value “2” and an icon pattern, where the expectation for the set value “2” is high May be provided.

  Further, in the present example, the icon image is displayed in the super reach to execute the suggestion effect during the reach, but the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. For example, it may be configured to execute the suggestion effect during the reach in all rotation reach in which all three decorative designs rotate in a state in which all the decorative designs in the left, middle and right align with the same design. Also, in this case, for example, for a combination of a specific setting value and the all-rotation reach, an expectation for the setting value of high degree of interest may be configured to be high.

  Further, the types of icon patterns are not limited to the icon patterns 1 to 9 shown in this example. For example, in this example, as in the icon patterns 2 to 9, the case where icon images are displayed on all three panel images B to D other than the panel image A is shown, but the panel images B to D are not necessarily displayed. The icon image does not need to be displayed at all, and it may be configured such that there is an icon pattern in which the icon image is displayed only in any one or two panel images of panel images B to D.

  Next, the CPU for effect control 120 executes a process for suggesting an effect during game determination processing to determine presence / absence of an effect during game and an effect mode (step 121 IWS 606).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether the pre-reading zone effect executing flag is set (step 121 IWS 607). If the pre-reading zone effect executing flag is set, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variable display to be started this time is the variable display of the first special symbol (step 121 IWS 608). In addition, whether it is a case to start the variation display of the first special symbol, for example, it is specified that the first symbol variation specification command (the first special symbol variation display is sent) transmitted at the start of the variation display It can be determined by confirming whether or not the effect control command to be performed has been received. If the variable display of the first special symbol is to be started, the effect control CPU 120 adds 1 to the value of the prefetch zone effect number counter (step 121 IWS 609).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the value of the pre-reading zone effect frequency counter after addition is 1 (step 121 IWS 610). If the value of the pre-reading zone effect frequency counter is 1 (that is, if performing the first change eye pre-reading zone effect), the effect control CPU 120 determines an initial effect pattern as the pre-reading zone effect pattern (step 121 IWS 611). Then, the process proceeds to step 121IWS616.

  If the value of the pre-reading zone effect frequency counter is not 1, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the current fluctuation display is a big hit (step 121 IWS 612). In addition, it is possible to determine, for example, by confirming the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area whether or not the fluctuation display is a big hit. If it is the fluctuation display which becomes the big hit, CPU120 for production control selects as the table in order to decide the pre-reading zone production pattern, the pre-reading zone production frequency pretend zone production pattern decision table according to the value of pre-reading zone production frequency counter 121 IWS 613). In addition, if it is not the fluctuation display which becomes the big hit, CPU120 for production control selects the reading zone preselection zone effect pattern decision table according to the value of prereading zone effect frequency counter as a table for deciding prereading zone effect pattern (Step 121 IWS 614). Then, the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on random numbers using the selected pre-reading zone effect pattern determination table, and determines a pre-reading zone effect pattern (step 121 IWS 615).

  FIG. 20-28 is an explanatory drawing showing a specific example of the pre-reading zone effect pattern determination table. Among them, FIG. 20-28 (A) shows a specific example of the jackpot pre-reading zone effect pattern determination table for the big hit when the value of the pre-reading zone effect counter is 2 (when performing the second change eye pre-reading zone effect). ing. Further, FIG. 20-28 (B) shows a specific example of the look-ahead zone effect pattern determination table for losing when the value of the pre-reading zone effect counter is 2 (when performing the second change second look-ahead zone effect) There is. Moreover, FIG. 20-28 (C) shows the specific example of the big hit use prefetch zone rendering pattern determination table in the case where the value of the prefetch zone rendering counter is 3 (in the case of executing the 3rd variation prefetching zone rendering) There is. Further, FIG. 20-28 (D) shows a specific example of the look-ahead zone effect pattern determination table for losing when the value of the look-ahead zone effect counter is 3 (when performing the 3rd change eye pre-reading zone effect) There is. Also, FIG. 20-28 (E) shows a specific example of the jackpot preread zone effect pattern determination table for the big hit when the value of the preread zone effect counter is 4 (when performing the fourth change eye look ahead zone effect) There is. Also, FIG. 20-28 (F) shows a specific example of the look-ahead zone effect pattern determination table for losing when the value of the pre-reading zone effect counter is 4 (when performing the 4 th change eye pre-reading zone effect) There is.

  As shown in FIG. 20-28, in this example, there are three types of prefetch zone effect patterns 1 to 3 as prefetch zone effect patterns. The pre-reading zone effect pattern 1 is a pattern that suggests that the setting value is “1” if the current variation display results in a big hit. Further, the pre-reading zone effect pattern 2 is a pattern that suggests that the setting value is “2” if the current variation display results in a big hit. Further, the pre-reading zone effect pattern 3 is a pattern that suggests that the setting value is “3” if the current variation display results in a big hit.

  As shown in FIG. 20-28, in the present embodiment, when the value of the prefetch zone effect counter is 2 (when performing the second variation second prefetch zone effect), the setting value is “1” and the jackpot is hit. The preread zone effect pattern 1 is selected at a high rate of 80%. In addition, when the value of the prefetch zone effect counter is 3 (when performing the third zone prefetch zone effect), the prefetch zone effect pattern 2 has a high value of 80% when it is the set value “2” and a big hit occurs. Select by ratio. In addition, when the value of the prefetch zone effect counter is 4 (when performing the 4th change eye prefetch zone effect), if it is the set value “3” and becomes a big hit, the prefetch zone effect pattern 3 is 80% higher Select by ratio. Therefore, in the present example, when the set value "1" is suggested in the second change second look-ahead zone effect and a big hit is made, the accuracy of being the set value "1" is high, and the third change second set in the second zone read When the value "2" is suggested and it is a big hit, the accuracy of the setting value "2" is high when it is a big hit, and when the setting value "3" is suggested in the look-ahead zone effect of the fourth variation, it becomes a big hit The accuracy of setting value “3” is configured to be high.

  The configuration of the pre-reading zone effect pattern determination table is not limited to that shown in this example. For example, it is configured to use a different pre-reading zone effect pattern determination table depending on whether or not the current change display is a change target of the advance notification zone effect announcement target, or the distribution of determination values is made different. You may In this case, for example, if the current fluctuation display is a fluctuation display of the advance target of the pre-reading zone effect, if the current fluctuation display is off, the pre-reading zone effect pattern 3 suggesting the setting value “3” etc. You may be comprised so that the pattern which suggests setting may become easy to be selected.

  Next, if the effect control CPU 120 determines that the change pattern and the execution of the pre-reading zone effect, the in-reach indication effect, and the in-game indication effect are determined, the pre-reading zone effect (eg, pre-reading zone effect pattern) or the reach During the suggestion effect (for example, icon pattern), the process table according to the suggestion effect during game is selected (step 121 IWS 616). Then, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 121 IWS 617).

  The process table is a table in which process data to be referred to when the effect control CPU 120 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device (effect component) such as the image display device 5 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table is composed of data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer set values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data and sound number data are collected. In the display control execution data, data etc. is described which indicates the aspect of each variation constituting the variation aspect during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the decorative symbol. Specifically, data relating to the change of the display screen of the image display device 5 is described. Moreover, the fluctuation time in the aspect of the fluctuation | variation is set to the process timer set value. The effect control CPU 120 refers to the process table and performs control to display the decorative design in the variation mode set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value. The process table is stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12. Moreover, the process table is prepared according to each fluctuation pattern.

  In the process table used when effect control is executed for the fluctuation pattern with reach effect, the left symbol is stopped and displayed when the predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, and the right symbol is stopped when the predetermined time has elapsed. Process data indicating that it is to be displayed is set. It should be noted that instead of setting symbols to be stopped and displayed in the process table, images for displaying symbols are generated in combination according to the determined stop symbols and the pseudo stop symbols in the pseudo reunion and the slip effect. May be

  In addition, the CPU for effect control 120 is based on the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1), the effect device (image display device 5 as effect component, as effect component Control of the various lamps and the speakers 8L and 8R as presentation parts is executed (step 121IWS 618).

  In this characteristic portion 121IW, the CPU for effect control 120 controls variable display of the decoration pattern by the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command in a one-to-one manner, but the CPU 120 for effect control controls the fluctuation pattern command The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern command in the fluctuation time timer (step 121IWS619). Next, the effect control CPU 120 deletes one command (design designation command, variation category command, and pending storage count addition designation command) at the start winning combination stored in the storage area of the start winning combination command storage area, The contents of the start winning combination command storage area are shifted (step 121 IWS 620).

  Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect process flag to “2” (step 121 IWS 621), and ends the variable display start setting process.

(In-game indication effect determination process)
20-29 is a flow chart showing an example of the during-game suggestion effect determination process (step 121 IWS 606). In-game suggestion effect determination processing is executed in the variable display start setting processing (step S171). In the game during the suggestion effect determination process, CPU120 for effect control, during the special period (Y in step 121 IWS701), select the first game during the suggestion effect determination table (step 121 IWS 702), not during the special period In the case (N of step 121 IWS 701), the second game during suggestion effect determination table is selected (step 121 IWS 703). For example, when the setting change end command or the setting value command is received, the special period flag is set, and when the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example), the special period flag is reset. For example, by confirming the state of the special period flag, it is possible to confirm in step 121IWS 701 whether or not the special period is underway.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether the set value command reception flag is set (step 121 IWS 704). If the set value command reception flag is set (that is, if the set value command is normally received), the effect control CPU 120 determines the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 122, Using the selected in-game indication effect determination table, it is determined whether or not an in-game indication effect is to be executed, and an effect mode in the case of execution (step 121 IWS 705).

  FIG. 20-30 (A) is an explanatory view showing a first in-game suggestion effect determination table used in the special period, and FIG. 20-30 (B) is a second in-game suggestion effect in the non-special period It is explanatory drawing which shows a determination table.

  In the first and second in-game suggestion effect determination tables shown in FIGS. 20-30 (A) and (B), in-game suggestion effects are executed in the order of setting value “1” <“2” <“3” Judgment values are assigned to increase the rate of With such a configuration, it is suggested that the advantageous setting value is set by the suggestion effect during game being executed.

  In addition, with regard to the second effect mode (mini characters A and B appearance), the ratio to be executed in the order of the setting value "1" <"2" <"3" is high, and the first effect mode (mini character A appearance) The determination values are assigned such that the difference in the execution ratio between the set values is larger than that. That is, the second effect mode has a high degree of reliability for being set to a setting value more advantageous than the first effect mode.

  Further, in the first and second in-game suggestion effect determination tables shown in FIGS. 20-30 (A) and (B), the in-game indication effect of the second effect mode in which the reliability is high is executed only during the special period. Is configured as. With such a configuration, it is possible to give motivation to play a game in a special period, and to enhance interest.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 20-30 (A) and (B), the third effect mode (character C appearance) may be determined only when the setting value is “3”. Therefore, it is determined that the setting value is "3" by the in-game indication effect being executed in the third effect mode.

  If the setting value command reception flag is not set (that is, the setting change process has been executed, but the setting value command can not be received normally due to a reason such as a command drop or data corruption), effect control The CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current rendering mode is the rendering mode A (step 121 IWS 706). Note that whether or not the effect mode A is set can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the effect mode A flag is set. If it is the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 determines the presence / absence of the effect during the in-game indication effect and the effect mode, using the in-game indication effect determination table as the setting value “1” Step 121 IWS 707).

  By executing the processing of step 121 IWS 706 to S 707, in the present characteristic portion 121 IW, the setting value which is the most disadvantageous setting when the setting value command can not be received normally and the effect mode A is set. The presence or absence of the execution of the in-game indication effect and the effect mode are determined as being "1". As shown in FIGS. 20-30 (A) and (B), for the setting value “1”, the ratio itself for determining to execute the suggestion effect during game is low and the ratio determined as the second effect mode Is the lowest and is not determined to be the third effect mode. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the situation in which the suggestion effect during game is executed by the second effect mode or the third effect mode even though the disadvantageous setting value is set, and the player is discouraged instead. To prevent the decline in interest for the game.

  If the effect mode A is not in effect, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether the current effect mode is the effect mode C (step 121 IWS 708). Note that whether or not the effect mode C is set can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the effect mode C flag is set. If it is the effect mode C, the effect control CPU 120 determines the presence / absence of execution of the in-game indication effect and the effect mode using the in-game indication effect determination table for the effect mode C (step 121 IWS 709).

  20-30 (C) is an explanatory view showing an example of the during-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C. FIG. As shown in FIG. 20-30 (C), in the in-game suggestion effect determination table for effect mode C, the percentage determined to execute the in-game indication effect is lower than in the case of the setting value “3”. There is no case that the third effect mode is determined.

  By performing the processing of step 121 IWS 708 to S 709, in the present characteristic portion 121 IW, in the case where the setting value command can not be received normally and the effect mode C is set, the disadvantageous setting value is set. Although the suggestion effect during game is executed by the second effect mode and the third effect mode regardless of the situation, it is possible to reduce a situation in which the player is discouraged instead and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest for the game.

  On the other hand, when it is not the effect mode C (that is, when the current effect mode is the effect mode B), the effect control CPU 120 ends the process as it is. That is, in the case of the effect mode B, the in-game indication effect is restricted from being executed.

  By executing the processing of step 121 IWS 708, in the present characteristic part 121 IW, in the case where the setting value command can not be received normally and the effect mode B is performed, the suggestion effect during game is not executed, It is possible to prevent a drop in interest for the game by reducing the situation in which the suggestion effect during game is executed and the player is disappointed instead of being set despite the disadvantageous set value.

  Even when the setting value command can not be normally received in the effect mode B, the suggestion effect during game may be configured to be executable at a low rate. In this case, for example, a table is used in which the execution ratio of the in-game suggestion effect is set to be lower than the setting value “1” of the in-game suggestion effect determination table shown in FIGS. 20-30 (A) and (B). The game may be configured to determine the presence / absence and type of suggestion effect during game play.

  In addition, it is not restricted to the example shown to FIGS. 20-30 (A) and (B), According to a setting value, only a specific presentation mode (for example, the 2nd presentation mode) among a plurality of production modes is performed. The proportions may be different.

  Further, for example, when a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) of the plurality of effect modes is executed, the possibility of being a specific set value may be denied. For example, in the case of the setting value 1, setting is not performed when a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed by preventing the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) from being determined. The possibility of being the value 1 is negated, and it is determined that the setting value 2 or the setting value 3 is established. In addition, when a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed, it may be determined that it is a specific set value. For example, when a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed by setting a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) only in the case of the setting value 3, It is determined that the setting value is 3.

  In the feature portion 121IW, according to the setting value, it is possible to execute the in-game indication effect at a different ratio, but this is an indication effect in the game according to the setting value (the first effect aspect, the second effect aspect and the second 3) The execution ratio of the three rendering modes is different, the execution ratio of the first rendering mode, the second rendering mode and the third rendering mode is different depending on the setting value, and only the specific rendering mode is changing according to the setting value It is a concept that includes different execution rates.

  In addition, although this feature part 121IW is configured to be able to execute a suggestion effect during game in a common mode (for example, the first effect mode) in the special period and the non-special period, it is not limited to such a configuration. It may be possible to execute the different types of in-game suggestion effects. For example, the size and color of the mini character A may be different between the special period and the non-special period.

  In addition, in the main feature portion 121IW, the presence or absence of the in-game indication effect and the effect mode in the case of executing are different depending on whether the special period or the non-special period and the setting value. However, in addition to such a configuration, for example, the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern or the presence or absence of reach effect, the type of reach effect, the presence or absence of pseudo continuous effect, the type of pseudo continuous effect, the display result becomes a big hit Depending on whether or not etc., the presence or absence of execution of the suggestion effect during the game, the effect mode in the case of execution may be different.

  For example, the in-game suggestion effect may be executable only when at least the change pattern includes the reach effect (ie, the change time is longer than the non-reach change pattern). Also, for example, in the variation pattern including Super Reach B and the variation pattern including Super Reach A having a higher degree of expectation than Super Reach B, the latter is likely to have a higher ratio of during-game suggestion effects. You may make it so that the degree of reliability when the suggestion effect during the game is executed may be increased, or the rate at which the suggestion effect during the game is performed is high, and the degree of reliability when the effect is executed is It may be made higher.

  Also, for example, in the variation pattern including the pseudo-series effect and the variation pattern not including the pseudo-series effect (or the number of pseudo-sequences is smaller than the former), the ratio in which the former performs the suggestion effect during game is It may be higher, or the reliability when the suggestion effect during the game is executed may be higher, or the ratio when the suggestion effect during the game is performed is high, and when it is executed The reliability may be increased.

  Further, for example, in the variation pattern in which the display result is a big hit and the variation pattern in which the display result is not a big hit, the former may have a higher ratio of the suggestion effect during the game being executed, During the suggestion effect may be executed to increase the degree of reliability may be increased, during the game may be performed a higher percentage of the effect is performed, and may be increased when the degree of reliability is increased .

(Variable display effect processing)
20-31 is a flowchart showing variable-display effect processing (step S172) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variable display effect process, the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step 121IWS801) and subtracts 1 from the value of the fluctuation time timer (step 121IWS802). When the process timer times out (step 121 IWS 803), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer set value set next in the process table is set in the process timer (step 121 IWS 804). Further, the control state of the rendering device is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data and sound number data set next to the display control execution data (step 121IWS 805).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not super reach is being executed (step 121 IWS 806). Note that whether or not super reach is being performed can be determined, for example, by confirming the value of the fluctuation time timer set in step 121 IWS619 of the variable display start setting process. If the super reach is being executed, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the detection signal from the push button 31B is input (step 121IWS 807). If the detection signal from the push button 31B is input (that is, if the push button 31B is in the on state), the effect control CPU 120 counts the number of times the push button 31B is operated (the number of consecutive hits). The value of the operation number counter is incremented by 1 (step 121IWS 808).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the type of super reach is determined to be super reach A (step 121 IWS 809). If it is determined to be super reach A, the process directly proceeds to step 121IWS 818. If it has not been determined to be the super reach A (that is, if it is determined to be the super reach B to D), the CPU 120 for effect control checks whether or not the value of the operation number counter is 1 ( Step 121 IWS 810). If the value of the operation number counter is 1, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to erase the panel image A if the panel image A corresponding to the super reach A is displayed on the image display device 5 ( Step 121 IWS 811).

  If it is determined to be the super reach B to D by executing the processing of step 121 IWS 809 to S 811, the display is started in a state where the panel images A to D overlap on the image display device 5, and then push is performed. The panel image A is erased based on the fact that the button 31B is operated once.

  If the value of the operation number counter is not 1, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the type of super reach is determined to be super reach B (step 121 IWS 812). If it is determined to be the super reach B, the process directly proceeds to step 121IWS 818. If it has not been determined to be Super Reach B (that is, if it is decided to be Super Reach C to D), the effect control CPU 120 determines that the value of the operation number counter is a first predetermined number (for example, 10). Whether or not it is confirmed (step 121 IWS 813). If the value of the operation number counter is equal to the first predetermined number, the effect control CPU 120 controls to delete the panel image B if the panel image B corresponding to the super reach B is displayed on the image display device 5 (Step 121 IWS 814).

  By executing the processing of step 121 IWS 812 to S 814, when the super reach C to D is determined, the display is started with the panel images A to D overlapping the image display device 5, and the panel image A is started. Is erased, and the panel image B is erased based on the fact that the push button 31B has been repeatedly operated for the first predetermined number (for example, 10 times).

  If the value of the operation number counter is not the first predetermined number, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the type of super reach is determined to be the super reach C (step 121 IWS 815). If it is determined to be the super reach C, the process directly proceeds to step 121IWS 818. If it is not the case where it is determined to be the Super Reach C (ie, if it is determined to be the Super Reach D), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the value of the operation number counter has become the second predetermined number (for example, 20) It is confirmed whether or not it is (step 121 IWS 816). If the value of the operation number counter is equal to the second predetermined number, the effect control CPU 120 controls to delete the panel image C if the panel image C corresponding to the super reach C is displayed on the image display device 5 (Step 121 IWS 817).

  When it is determined to be the super reach D by executing the processing of step 121 IWS815 to S817, the display is started in a state where the panel images A to D overlap the image display device 5, and the panel image A and the panel After the image B is erased, the panel image C is erased based on the fact that the push button 31B has been continuously hit a second predetermined number (for example, 20 times).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the operation effective period during the super reach has ended (step 121IWS 818). Note that whether or not the operation valid period has ended can be determined, for example, by confirming the value of the fluctuation time timer set in step 121 IWS619 of the variable display start setting process. If the operation effective period has not ended, the process directly proceeds to step 121IWS826. If the operation effective period has ended, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the operation number counter is 1 or more (step 121 IWS 819). If the value of the operation number counter is not 1 or more (if the value of the operation number counter is 0 (that is, if the push button 31B is not operated at least once within the operation reach period of the super reach)), it is as it is Step 121: Move to IWS 824.

  If the value of the operation number counter is 1 or more (that is, if the push button 31B is operated at least once within the operation effective period during the super reach), the effect control CPU 120 sets the type of the super reach as the super reach type. It is confirmed whether or not reach C is determined (step 121 IWS 820). If it is determined to be the super reach C, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to forcibly delete the panel image B if the panel image B is still displayed on the image display device 5 (step 121 IWS 821). It should be noted that since it is determined that the push button 31B has been operated at least once at step 121IWS 819, at least the panel image A should be erased at this stage.

  If it is not determined that it is the super reach C, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether it is the case where it is determined that it is the super reach D as the type of super reach (step 121 IWS 822). If it is determined to be the super reach D, the effect control CPU 120 forcibly deletes the panel image B or panel image C if the panel image B or panel image C is still displayed on the image display device 5 Control is performed (step 121 IWS 823). It should be noted that since it is determined that the push button 31B has been operated at least once at step 121IWS 819, at least the panel image A should be erased at this stage.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that it is the super reach D (that is, if it is determined that it is the super reach A or the super reach B), the process proceeds to step 121 IWS 824 as it is.

  In the present example, when the super reach C or the super reach D is determined by executing the processing of step 121 IWS 819 to S 823, the player operates the push button 31 B up to the first predetermined number and the second predetermined number. If the panel image B and the panel image C are still displayed without being displayed, the panel image C and the panel image D are forcibly displayed at the top. For example, if the super reach C is determined, the panel image C is forcibly displayed at the top, and if the super reach D is determined, the panel image D is forcibly displayed. It is assumed that it is displayed at the top. On the other hand, in the case where it is determined to be the super reach B to D, in the case where the player has not operated the push button 31B even once (in this case, the panel image A is still displayed at the top) ), Does not change the state in which the panel image A is displayed at the top.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 switches to a process table corresponding to the super reach corresponding to the panel image displayed at the top of the image display device 5 (step 121 IWS 824). For example, when the panel image A is displayed at the top, the process data is switched to the process data according to the super reach A, and when the panel image B is displayed at the top, the process data is switched to the process data according to the super reach B. When the panel image C is displayed at the top, the process is switched to the process data according to the super reach C. When the panel image D is displayed at the top, the process is switched to the process data according to the super reach D. Then, the effect control CPU 120 restarts the process timer (step 121 IWS 825).

  Thereafter, the processing of step 121 IWS 805 is executed at the timing of the next timer interrupt according to the process data switched in step 121 IWS 824, whereby the effect of developing into super reach A to D is executed.

  The value of the operation number counter may be configured to be cleared to 0 when, for example, the super reach is ended and the variable display is ended thereafter.

  Then, if the fluctuation time timer has timed out (step 121IWS826), the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect process flag to “3” (step 121IWS827), and ends the variable display effect process.

(Did you decide during the big hit)
FIG. 20-33 is a flow chart showing an example of the jackpot effect determination process. The jackpot effect determination process is executed in the jackpot opening pre-processing (step S114). In the jackpot effect determination process, the CPU for effect control 120 checks whether or not the set value command reception flag is set (step 121 IWS 901). If the set value command reception flag is set (that is, if the set value command is normally received), the effect control CPU 120 determines the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 122, It is determined whether or not the jackpot suggestion effect is to be executed, and the effect mode in the case of execution (step 121 IWS 902). Then, the process proceeds to step 121IWS 907.

  In step S121 IWS 902, if it is a period until the variable display is executed a specific number of times (100 times in this example) from the game start time (hereinafter, also referred to as a specific period), the second shown in FIG. One big hit inside suggestion production decision table is selected, when it is not during specified period, the 2nd big hit inside suggestion production decision table which is shown in Figure 20-34 (B) it selects. Then, based on the selected jackpot suggestion effect determination table and the set value, it is determined whether or not the jackpot suggestion effect is to be executed, and the effect mode in the case of execution. In addition, although the "game start time" here refers to the time when the first variable display is started after the power is turned on, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, the first change after the end of the last run. It may be the time when the display is started, or it may be the time when the first variable display is started after the end of the customer waiting demonstration effect. Further, in this characteristic portion 121IW, regardless of whether or not the setting change is performed at the time of power on, the period from the game start time until the fluctuation display is executed a specific number of times (100 times in this example) is a specific period. However, when the setting is changed when the power is turned on, a period from the game start time until the variable display is performed a specific number of times (100 times in this example) may be set as the specific period. Also, for example, the specific period is divided into a plurality of periods, and the first specific period (period from the game start time until the variable display is executed 50 times) and the second specific period (51st change after the game start) A jackpot suggestion presentation determination table may be used in which the presence or absence of a jackpot suggestion effect and the determination ratio of the presentation mode are different between the display and the period until the 100th variation display is executed.

  In the first and second big hit medium suggestion effect determination tables shown in Fig. 20-34 (A) and (B), big hit time suggestion effects are executed in the order of setting value "1" <"2" <"3" Judgment values are assigned to increase the rate of According to such a configuration, it is suggested that the jackpot suggestion effect is executed to be set to an advantageous set value.

  Moreover, about the 2nd presentation mode and the 3rd presentation mode, the ratio performed in order of setting value "1" <"2" <"3" is high, and the execution ratio between setting values in a specific period and a non-specific period Judgment values are assigned such that the difference between That is, in the specific period, the jackpot suggestion effect with higher reliability is performed than in the non-specific period. With such a configuration, it is possible to give motivation to play a game in a specific period, and to enhance interest. In addition to the configuration of the feature portion 121IW, the jackpot medium suggestion effect (or the specific effect mode thereof) may be performed only during a specific period, and may not be performed during a non-specific period.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 20-34 (A) and (B), the fourth effect mode may be determined only when the setting value is "3". Therefore, it is determined that the setting value is "3" by executing the big hit during the big hit by the fourth effect mode.

  In the present feature portion 121IW, when the big hit during the suggestion effect is executed by the third effect mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 20-35 (A1), in the image display device 5, the decorative symbol to be a big hit is stopped and displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 20-35 (B1), a serif C image (“high setting !?”) 121IW 102 is displayed.

  In addition, when the big hit during the suggestion effect is executed by the fourth effect mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 20-35 (A1), after the stop display of the decorative pattern that becomes the big hit in the image display device 5, As shown in 20-36 (C1), a serif D image ("high setting confirmed") 121IW 105 is displayed.

  If the setting value command reception flag is not set (that is, the setting change process has been executed, but the setting value command can not be received normally due to a reason such as a command drop or data corruption), effect control The CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current rendering mode is the rendering mode A (step 121 IWS 903). Note that whether or not the effect mode A is set can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the effect mode A flag is set. In the case of the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 determines the presence / absence and effect mode of the big hit medium suggestion effect using the selected big hit medium suggestion effect determination table as the setting value “1” ( Step 121 IWS 904). Then, the process proceeds to step 121IWS 907.

  By executing the processing of step 121 IWS 903 to S 904, the present characteristic portion 121 IW is the case where the setting value command can not be received normally, and in the case of the effect mode A, the setting value being the most disadvantageous setting. The presence or absence of the execution of the jackpot suggestion effect and the presentation mode are determined as being "1". As shown in FIGS. 20-34 (A) and (B), the ratio determined as the second effect mode or the third effect mode is the lowest for the set value “1”, and the fourth effect mode is determined. If not be. By configuring as such, although the adverse setting value is set, the jackpot suggestion effect is executed by the second effect mode, the third effect mode, and the third effect mode, and the player is discouraged instead. To prevent the decline in interest for the game.

  If the effect mode A is not in effect, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether the current effect mode is the effect mode C (step 121 IWS 905). Note that whether or not the effect mode C is set can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the effect mode C flag is set. In the case of the effect mode C, the effect control CPU 120 determines the presence / absence of execution of the indicated effect in the large hit and the effect mode using the large hit / inside suggested effect determination table for the effect mode C (step 121 IWS 906). Then, the process proceeds to step 121IWS 907.

  FIG. 20-34 (C) is an explanatory view showing an example of a jackpot inside suggested effect determination table for the effect mode C. FIG. As shown in FIG. 20-34 (C), in the jackpot hinting presentation determination table for the presentation mode C, the percentage itself deciding to execute the jackpot suggestion in the case of setting values “2” and “3” is low. The ratio determined to be the second effect mode or the third effect mode is lower than that of the second effect mode, and may not be determined to be the fourth effect mode.

  By performing the processing of step 121 IWS 905 to S 906, in the present characteristic portion 121 IW, in the case where the setting value command can not be received normally and the effect mode C is set, the disadvantageous setting value is set. It is possible to reduce a situation in which a big hit during the big hit is executed by the second effect mode, the third effect mode, and the third effect mode regardless of being played, causing a player to be discouraged and prevent a decline in interest for the game I have to.

  On the other hand, when it is not the rendering mode C (that is, when the current rendering mode is the rendering mode B), the CPU 120 for production control moves directly to step 121IWS 907. That is, in the case of the effect mode B, the jackpot is limited so as not to execute the suggestion effect during the big hit.

  By executing the processing of step 121 IWS 905, in the present characteristic portion 121 IW, in the case where the setting value command can not be received normally and the effect mode B is performed, by not executing the jackpot suggestion effect, In spite of the fact that the disadvantageous set value is set, the jackpot suggestion effect is executed to reduce the situation in which the player is discouraged instead of being discouraged, and it is possible to prevent the decline in interest for the game.

  Even in the case where the setting value command can not be normally received in the effect mode B, it may be possible to execute the suggestion effect during the big hit at a low rate. In this case, for example, a table is used in which the execution ratio of the big hit during the big hit is set lower than the setting value “1” of the big hit during the big hit effect determination table shown in FIGS. 20-34 (A) and (B). It may be configured to determine the presence or the type of the suggestion effect during the big hit.

  In addition, it is not restricted to the example shown to FIGS. 20-34 (A) and (B), According to a setting value, only a specific presentation mode (for example, the 3rd presentation mode) among a plurality of production modes is performed. The proportions may be different.

  Also, in the example shown in FIG. 20-34 (A), when a big hit is made in a specific period, a big hit during the suggestion effect is always executed, but it may not be carried out at a low rate. May be In this case, the rate of non-execution may be made different according to the set value. Also, in the example shown in FIG. 20-34 (B), regardless of the setting value, the ratio in which the big hit during the suggestion is not executed is configured to be the same, but if the ratio not executed in accordance with the setting value is different You may make it

  Further, in the present characteristic portion 121IW, when a big hit occurs in a specific period, a big hit inside suggestive effect is executed as a setting suggestive effect, but in addition to or in place of such a configuration, A setting suggestion effect (for example, a serif image suggesting a set value is displayed when the predetermined condition is satisfied) may be executed based on the predetermined condition being satisfied in the specific period. In this case, the predetermined condition may be satisfied by, for example, that the number of times of execution of the reach effect or the pseudo continuous effect has reached a predetermined number, or that a specific super reach effect or a notice effect is performed.

  In the present feature portion 121 IW, it is possible to execute the big hit during the big hit in different proportions according to the set value, but this is a big hit during the big hit according to the set value (the first production mode, the second production mode, the third The execution ratio of the effect mode and the fourth effect mode is different, the execution ratio of the first effect mode, the second effect mode, the third effect mode and the fourth effect mode is different according to the setting value, the setting value It is a concept including that an execution rate changes only according to a specific presentation mode (for example, the 3rd presentation mode) according to.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines the presence or absence of the execution of the feature effect (step 121 IWS 907).

  Here, for example, as shown in FIG. 20-35 (A1), the movable member 121IW 101 is provided above the image display device 5. In such a configuration, when the feature effect is executed, control is performed to move the movable member 121IW 101 to the front surface of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 20-35 (B2).

  As shown in FIGS. 20-35 (A1) and (B2), since the movable member 121IW 101 moves to the front of the image display device 5 when the feature effect is executed, the image display device 5 is suggested by the big hit during the big hit It becomes difficult to visually recognize the position where the speech image is displayed. In the feature portion 121IW, since the jackpot suggestion effect and the feature effect are executed at different timings in the fanfare period in the jackpot game, the movable member 121IW101 actually moved to the front of the image display device 5 is a jackpot. It does not cover the serif image that is displayed by the suggestion effect. However, during the fanfare period, if the movable member 121IW101 is operated by the character effect, the player's attention is directed to the movable member 121IW101, and there is a possibility that the speech image displayed by the suggestion effect during the big hit may be overlooked. Therefore, in the step 121 IWS 907, by using the feature effect determination table shown in FIG. 20-34 (D), when the big hit during the suggestion effect is executed, the feature effect is not performed. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a reduction in interest from making it difficult for the jackpot suggestion effect to be recognized. In addition, with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the jackpot suggestion effect from being hard to recognize even if the jackpot suggestion effect and the feature effect presentation are performed at the same timing.

  In addition, when execution of the big hit during the suggestion production is decided, either execution timing of the big hit during the suggestion production and the feature production is changed (for example, the feature production is done during the fanfare period, the big hit suggestion production during the big hit) In the ending period), it may be possible to prevent the jackpot suggestion effect from becoming hard to recognize. In addition, when execution of the big hit inside suggestion effect is decided, changing the operation aspect of the movable component 121IW101 (for example, controlling not to stop at the position where it overlaps with the serif image by the big hit inside suggestion effect) or The display position of the speech image by the middle suggestion effect may be changed to prevent the jackpot middle suggestion effect from being hard to recognize. In addition, when the execution of the jackpot suggestion effect is determined, the execution of the feature effect may be limited by reducing the execution ratio of the feature effect. Further, the execution of the feature presentation may be limited only during a specific period. In addition to the example shown in FIG. 20-34 (D), the bonus game effect may be executed at a low rate even when the jackpot inside suggested effect is executed.

  Next, when the effect control is not performed (N in step 121IWS 908), the effect control CPU 120 determines the presence or absence of light guide effect (step 121IWS 909).

  Here, on the front surface of the image display device 5, a light guide plate 121IW103 having translucency capable of transmitting light, and a light emitter provided so as to allow light to enter from the end face of the light guide plate are provided. It is assumed that a reflecting portion is provided to reflect light incident on the inside of the light guide plate 121IW103 from the end face of the light guide plate 121IW103 by the light emitter and to emit the light to the front of the gaming machine. Then, by causing the light emitter to emit light, it is possible to execute a light guide plate effect that causes light to be emitted from the reflection portion provided in the light guide plate 121IW103 to the front surface of the gaming machine. In such a configuration, when the light guide plate effect is executed, light is emitted from the reflection portion provided on the light guide plate 121IW103 to the front surface of the gaming machine as shown in FIG. 20-35 (B3), “big hit” The letter of appears. In addition, while the light guide plate effect is being performed, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the image displayed on the image display device 5.

  In step 121 IWS 909, by using the light guide plate effect determination table shown in FIG. 20-34 (E), the light guide plate effect is executed at different rates depending on the presence or absence of the suggestion effect during the big hit and the effect mode when it is executed. Ru. Specifically, when the jackpot suggestion effect of the first effect mode is executed, the ratio at which the light guide plate effect is executed is high, and the suggestion of the second effect mode, the third effect mode, and the fourth effect mode is suggested When the effect is performed, the ratio at which the light guide plate effect is performed is configured to be low. That is, when a big hit during the big hit in the production mode that is not suggested to be an advantageous setting value is performed, the ratio at which the light guide effect is performed is high, and the big hit during the big hit is configured to be difficult to see There is. For example, as shown in FIG. 20-35 (B4), when the serif A image ("setting is ...") 121 IW 104 is displayed by the jackpot suggestion effect of the first effect mode, the light guide plate effect is executed If so, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the serif A image. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the interest of playing the game by the suggestion of the jackpot during the undesirable presentation mode for the player. In addition, when the big hit inside suggestion production of the 2nd production mode, the 3rd production mode and the 4th production mode is executed, the execution timing of either the big hit inside suggestion production and the light guide plate production is changed (for example, light guide plate The presentation may be performed in the fanfare period, and the jackpot suggestion may be performed in the ending period).

(Small hit end effect processing)
FIG. 20-37 is a flowchart showing the small hitting end effect process (step S175) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the small hitting end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 first subtracts one from the effect period measurement timer (step 121 IWS 1001). Then, it is checked whether or not the effect period measurement timer after subtraction has timed out (step 121 IWS 1002). Note that the effect period measurement timer is set based on, for example, confirmation of reception of the small hit end designation command in the small hit middle effect process (see step S174).

  If the effect period measurement timer has not timed out (N in step 121 IWS 1002), the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step 121 IWS 1003). In addition, the CPU for effect control 120 is based on the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1), the effect device (image display device 5 as effect component, as effect component Control of the game effect lamp 9 and the speakers 8L and 8R as presentation parts is executed (step 121 IWS 1004).

  Next, when the process timer has not timed out (N in step 121 IWS 1005), the effect control CPU 120 ends the process. When the process timer times out (Y in step 121 IWS 1005), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer set value set next in the process table is set in the process timer (step 121 IWS 1006). Further, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer (step 121 IWS 1007).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects the effect stage determination table according to the small hit type as a table for determining whether to change the effect stage after the small hit game is over and the type of effect stage after the change. (Step 121 IWS 1008). Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on random numbers using the selected effect stage determination table, and determines whether to change the effect stage after the small hitting game is over and determines the type of effect stage after the change (Step 121 IWS 1009).

  FIGS. 20-38 is an explanatory view showing a specific example of the effect stage determination table. Among these, FIG. 20-38 (A) has shown the specific example of the presentation stage determination table selected when it is small hitting classification A. As shown in FIG. Further, FIG. 20-38 (B) shows a specific example of the effect stage determination table selected in the case of the small hitting type B. Further, FIG. 20-38 (C) shows a specific example of the effect stage determination table selected in the case of the small hitting type C.

  As shown in FIG. 20-38, in the effect stage determination table, determination values are assigned to no effect stage change, change to effect stage A, change to effect stage B, and change to effect stage C, respectively. There is. When the effect stage is changed, as shown in FIG. 20-38, when the setting value is “1”, the ratio of changing to the effect stage A is high. Therefore, in the present example, when the effect stage A is changed after the small hit game is over, it is suggested that the setting value is "1". Further, when the effect stage is changed, as shown in FIG. 20-38, when the setting value is “2”, the ratio of changing to the effect stage B is high. Therefore, in the present example, when the effect stage B is changed after the small hit game is over, it is suggested that the setting value is "2". When the effect stage is changed, as shown in FIG. 20-38, the effect stage C may be changed only when the setting value is "3". Accordingly, in the present example, when the effect stage C is changed after the small hit game is over, it is suggested that the setting value is "3".

  Further, as shown in FIG. 20-38 (C), in this example, in the case of the small hitting type C, when the setting value is “1”, the rendering stage A is selected at a high rate of 50%. When the setting value is "2", the rendering stage B is selected at a high rate of 60%, and when the setting value is "3", the rendering stage C is selected at a high rate of 50%. There is. Therefore, in the present example, the suggestion of the setting value by the effect stage changed after the end of the small hit game based on the small hit type C is the highest in reliability. On the other hand, in the present example, in the case of the small hitting type A, the proportion for selecting the rendering stage A is only 30% when the setting value is “1”, and the rendering stage when the setting value is “2”. The proportion for selecting B is only 40%, and for the setting value “3”, the proportion for selecting the rendering stage C is only 30%. Therefore, in this example, the suggestion of the setting value by the effect stage changed after the end of the small hit game based on the small hit type A has the lowest reliability.

  Also, in this example, as shown in FIG. 20-38, the effect stage is not necessarily changed after the small hit game is over, and there may be cases where it is determined without effect stage change, but the setting value "1" The ratio determined without effect stage change is different according to which of “3” (in other words, the ratio of changing the effect stage is also different).

  Further, in the present example, as shown in FIG. 20-38, there is provided an effect stage C for determining that the set value is “3”, and a specific effect stage (in the present example, the effect is provided according to the set value) The rate of change to stage C) is different. In addition, for example, even if the setting value is “1” or “2”, it may be configured to be changed to the rendering stage C at a low rate, not limited to such an aspect.

  Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 20-38, there is shown a case in which the presence / absence of change of the effect stage and the determination ratio of the type of effect stage after change are different by the lottery process by the effect control CPU 120. Not limited to such an aspect. For example, when the small hitting probability is configured to differ depending on which of the setting values “1” to “3”, the small hitting probability varies depending on the setting value, and as a result, the effect stage is changed Alternatively, the determination ratio of the type of the presentation stage after the change may be made different. Further, for example, the presence / absence of change of the presentation stage for each small hit type and the determination ratio of the type of presentation stage after the change are configured to be the same, and which of the setting values “1” to “3” Accordingly, by determining the small hitting type according to the different ratio according to the ratio, the determination ratio of the presence or absence of the change of the presentation stage or the type of the presentation stage after the change may be made different.

  When it is determined to change the rendering stage (Y in step 121IWS1010), the CPU 120 for effect control sets the background image displayed on the image display device 5 to the background image according to the rendering stage after the change. Control to change is performed (step 121 IWS1011).

  In the present characteristic portion 121IW, when a small hit occurs and the rendering stage is changed, a background image according to the new rendering stage is displayed over a plurality of variable displays until the next small hit occurs. I assume.

  In addition, for example, after changing the rendering stage and ending the variable display a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) after changing the rendering stage, it returns to the normal rendering stage and returns to the normal background image, for example. It may be configured. Also, for example, the staging stage may be configured to be changeable each time a small hit occurs, or once the staging stage has been changed, even if a small hit occurs, the staging stage is not changed. It may be configured.

  Further, in this example, when the effect stage is changed after the end of the small hit game, the background image corresponding to the effect stage after the change is displayed over a plurality of variable displays, but such an aspect Not limited. For example, it is not necessary to execute over a plurality of variable displays, and perform an effect that suggests a set value only once after the small hit game is over (perform a single effect that suggests a set value) It may be configured.

  If the effect period measurement timer has timed out (Y in step 121 IWS 1002), the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect process flag to “0” (step 121 IWS 1012), and ends the small hitting end effect processing.

  Next, an example of effects in the main feature portion 121IW will be described. First, an effect mode in the case of changing the effect stage after the end of the small hit game will be described. FIGS. 20-39 and 20-40 are explanatory views showing an example of an effect mode in the case of changing the effect stage after the end of the small hit game. In FIGS. 20-39 and 20-40, it is assumed that the effect mode changes in the order of (A), (B), and (C).

  First, in the example shown in FIG. 20-39, it is assumed that the setting value is "1". As shown in FIG. 20-39 (A), the variable display of the decorative pattern on the left middle and right is executed, and as shown in FIG. 20-39 (B), the small hit of small hitting type B as the stop symbol of the decorative pattern. It is assumed that a symbol (in this example, a combination of symbols of "357") is displayed and small hit game is executed. Then, it is decided to change to the rendering stage A which suggests that the setting value is “1”, and as shown in FIG. 20-39 (C), the image display device 5 responds to the rendering stage A It is assumed that the background image has been changed. In the example shown in FIG. 20-39 (C), a case is shown in which the background image according to the effect stage A is changed to an image in which a flock of fish 121 IW 106 is swimming in the sea.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 20-40, it is assumed that the setting value is “3”. As shown in Figure 20-40 (A), the variation display of the decorative pattern on the left middle right is executed, and as shown in Figure 20-40 (B), the small hit of category C as a stop pattern of the ornamental symbol It is assumed that a symbol (in this example, a combination of symbols of "579") is displayed and small hit game is executed. Then, it is decided to change to the rendering stage C which suggests that the setting value is “3”, and as shown in FIG. 20-40 (C), the image display device 5 responds to the rendering stage C It is assumed that the background image has been changed. In the example shown in FIG. 20-40 (C), as the background image according to the effect stage C, the case where the rocket 121 IW 107 is changed to an image flying toward the moon 121 IW 108 in the outer space is shown.

  In addition, the effect mode shown to FIGS. 20-39 and 20-40 is an example, for example, when it becomes small hitting classification A, it is small hitting in FIGS. 20-39 (B) and FIGS. 20-40 (B). A small hit symbol of type A (for example, a combination of symbols of "135") may be displayed in a definite manner. Also, for example, when changing to the effect stage B, a background image corresponding to the effect stage B in FIGS. 20-39 (C) and 20-40 (C) (for example, a flock of birds flew in the air) Image) should be changed.

  Moreover, although the example shown in FIG. 20-39 shows the case where it is changed to the rendering stage A, in this example, it is changed to the rendering stage B at a low ratio even if it is the setting value "1". (See Figure 20-38). Moreover, although the example shown to FIGS. 20-40 shows the case where it is changed into the production stage C, in this example, even if it is a setting value "3", the production stage A and the production stage are in a low ratio. It may be changed to B (see FIG. 20-38).

  In addition, the effect aspect in the case of changing a presentation stage after completion | finish of a small hit game is not restricted only to what was shown by FIG. 20-39 or FIG. 20-40. For example, when the small hit game is over, the battle effect is executed, and when the ally character wins the battle, the setting stage is suggested by changing the effect stage and the background image is switched, and the ally character loses the battle. The background image may not be changed either. As such, various presentation modes can be considered.

  Also, in this example, a case has been shown where the setting value is suggested by changing the effect stage after the end of the small hitting game, but a method of indicating the setting value in relation to the small hitting is shown in this example. Not limited. For example, when a small hitting game period is secured to some extent, the setting value may be suggested by causing a predetermined character or the like associated with the setting value to appear during the small hitting game. . Also, for example, when a plurality of combinations of small hit symbols (combination of decorative symbols) are provided, the small hit symbols and the set values are configured to be associated, and any small hit symbols are displayed stopped. May be configured to indicate a set value. Also, for example, when it is configured to be able to shift to a so-called probable latent state after sudden big hit or small hit, the set value can be suggested to be able to be suggested depending on whether the definite latent period after small hit is long or short You may be comprised so that the presentation which suggests a setting value in inside may be performed.

  Moreover, in this example, although the case where a presentation stage is changed on the assumption that predetermined conditions were satisfied triggered by the end of the small hit game, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, a lottery process based on random numbers may be performed, and the rendering stage may be changed as if the predetermined condition is satisfied based on the winning of the lottery. Further, for example, the rendering stage may be changed as if the predetermined condition is satisfied based on the fact that the number of times of execution of the variable display has reached the predetermined number.

  Next, an effect aspect of the pre-reading zone effect will be described. FIGS. 20-41 and 20-42 are explanatory diagrams for describing an effect aspect of the pre-reading zone effect. In FIGS. 20-41 and 20-42, it is assumed that the effect mode changes in the order of (A), (B), (C), and so on.

  As shown in FIG. 20-41 (A), the start winning to the first start winning opening newly occurs during the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol, and four first hold displays are accumulated in the first hold storage display portion 121IW109. It is assumed that the Then, it is assumed that the execution of the pre-reading zone effect is determined based on the occurrence of the start winning to the first start winning opening anew.

  Next, when the first variable display is performed after the start winning on the first start winning opening, as shown in FIG. 20-41 (B), the prefetch zone effect based on the first effect pattern is executed. In the example shown in FIG. 20-41 (B), a case is shown in which the character 121IW110 is displayed in the image display device 5 and the character display 121IW111 of "zone entry!" Is displayed as a line of the character 121IW110. .

  In the case of a big hit in the first variable display, the pre-reading zone effect is ended as it is, and it does not shift to the following effect screen of FIG. 20-41 (C) (therefore, in this case, pre-reading zone Although the presentation is performed, the indication of the set value is not made substantially).

  Next, after the start winning on the first start winning opening, when performing the second variable display, it is assumed that the prefetch zone effect pattern 1 is determined as the prefetch zone effect pattern (see FIG. 20-28). Then, as shown in FIG. 20-41 (C), pre-reading zone effect based on pre-reading zone effect pattern 1 is executed. In the example shown in FIG. 20-41 (C), while the character 121IW110 is displayed in the image display device 5, as a line of the character 121IW110, "If it is now, set" 1 "? The case where the character display 121IW112 of "is displayed is shown.

  In the case of a big hit in the second variable display, the pre-reading zone effect is ended as it is, and the transition to the effect screen of FIG. 20-41 (D) does not occur. In this case, "If you hit now, set" 1 "? It is suggested that the setting value is “1” based on the occurrence of the jackpot when the character display 121 IW 112 of “is displayed.

  Next, after the start winning on the first start winning opening, when the third variable display is performed, it is assumed that the prefetch zone effect pattern 2 is determined as the prefetch zone effect pattern (see FIG. 20-28). Then, as shown in FIG. 20-41 (D), pre-reading zone effect based on pre-reading zone effect pattern 2 is executed. In the example shown in FIG. 20-41 (D), the character 121IW110 is displayed on the image display device 5 and "as it is now, setting" 2 "as a line of the character 121IW110? The case where the character display 121IW113 of "is displayed is shown.

  In addition, when it becomes a big hit in the third variable display, the pre-reading zone effect is ended as it is, and the transition to the effect screen of FIG. In this case, "If you hit now, set" 2 "? It is suggested that the setting value "2" is set based on the occurrence of the jackpot when the character display 121IW 113 of "" is displayed.

  Next, after the start winning on the first start winning opening, when performing the fourth variable display, it is assumed that the prefetch zone effect pattern 3 is determined as the prefetch zone effect pattern (see FIG. 20-28). Then, as shown in FIG. 20-42 (E), the pre-reading zone effect based on the pre-reading zone effect pattern 3 is executed. In the example shown in FIG. 20-42 (E), while the character 121IW110 is displayed in the image display device 5, as a line of the character 121IW110, "If it is now, setting" 3 "? The case where the character display 121IW114 of "is displayed is shown.

  If the third variation display results in a big hit, the pre-reading zone effect is ended. In this case, "If you hit now, set" 3 "? It is suggested that the setting value “3” is set based on the occurrence of the big hit when the character display 121 IW 114 of “is displayed. Further, in this example, the pre-reading zone effect is ended even when a big hit does not occur in the third variable display (therefore, in this case, so-called pre-reading zone effect of gasse is executed) ).

  It is to be noted that FIGS. 20-41 and 20-42 are merely examples, and for example, even when the second variable display is performed after the start winning, the ratio is low in FIG. 20-41 (C). The look-ahead zone effect which suggests setting value "2" or "3" by may be performed (refer FIG. 20-28). Also, for example, even when the third variable display is performed after the start winning, the prefetch zone effect to suggest setting values “1” and “3” is executed at a low rate in FIG. 20-41 (D) (See Figure 20-28). Also, for example, even when the fourth variable display is performed after the start winning, the prefetch zone effect to suggest setting values “1” and “2” is executed at a low rate in FIG. 20-42 (E). (See Figure 20-28).

  Further, in this example, when the first variable display is executed after the start winning, the pre-reading zone effect is executed based on the first effect pattern, and the case of displaying the character display 121 IW 111 of “zone entry!” Is shown. However, even when the first variable display is performed, an effect that suggests setting values "1" to "3" in the same manner as in Figs. 20-41 (C) to 20-42 (E). May be configured to perform.

  Moreover, in this example, although the case where a setting value is suggested as what a predetermined condition was satisfied was shown based on that a big hit occurred during execution of prefetch zone production, it is not restricted to such a mode. For example, the setting value may be suggested as a predetermined condition is satisfied by displaying a predetermined character or emitting light from a lamp or an LED during execution of the prefetch zone effect, and various aspects Is considered.

  Further, in this example, the case is described where the prefetch zone effect is executed over a plurality of variable displays, but not limited to such an aspect, for example, the setting value is suggested in the effect to be executed during one variable display. It may be configured as possible. For example, a gauge display or the like in which the indicator moves according to the passage of time is displayed on the image display device 5 during one time of variable display, and at any point in the gauge display the indicator fulfills some fulfillment conditions on presentation For example, the set value may be suggested on the basis of winning or clearing of the battle.

  Further, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 20-41 and 20-42, when the pre-reading zone effect is executed in a plurality of variable displays, "if it is now, set" 1 "for each variable display. ? "" If you hit now, set "2"? The case where the present setting value is indicated is indicated by displaying a character display such as "," but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, "If it is right now, set" 1 "? "" If you hit now, set "2"? Even if the character display such as "" is switched in order and displayed, it is configured so that the current setting value is suggested by the content of the character display that is finally displayed when the big hit occurs at the end of the variable display. Good. For example, "If set, set 2?" If the variable display ends and a big hit occurs while the character display of “] is displayed, it is suggested that the setting value is“ 2 ”, and if“ I hit now, the setting “3”? When the variable display ends and a big hit occurs while the character display of “is displayed, it may be suggested that the setting value is“ 3 ”. In addition, when the character display is sequentially switched and displayed during one change display, for example, the character display may be switched at the timing of occurrence of the advance effect or the timing of development of the reach effect. Good. Further, for example, in the case of the variable display accompanied by the pseudo run, the character display may be switched at the timing of performing the re-variation.

  Next, an effect aspect of the in-reach indication effect will be described. Drawing 20-43 and Drawing 20-44 are explanatory views for explaining the production mode of suggestion production during reach. In FIGS. 20-43 and 20-44, it is assumed that the effect mode changes in the order of (A), (B), (C), and so on.

  As shown in Fig. 20-43 (A), when starting the variation display of the decorative symbol, execute the Super Reach D as the type of the Super Reach based on the designation of the Super Reach in the variation pattern. (See FIGS. 20-25), and icon pattern 5 is determined as the icon pattern (see FIGS. 20-26 (A) to (D)).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 20-43 (B), the left and right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed with the same symbol (in this example, symbol "7"), and normal reach occurs. Next, at the start timing of the super reach, as shown in FIG. 20-43 (C), in the image display device 5, the panel image A121 IW115 corresponding to the super reach A as the head and the panel image B121 IW116 corresponding to the super reach B. A panel image C121IW117 corresponding to the super reach C and a panel image C121IW118 corresponding to the super reach D are displayed in a state of being sequentially overlapped. Further, based on the fact that the icon pattern 5 has been determined, the icon image “●” 121IW119 is displayed on the panel image B121IW116, the icon image “▲” 121IW120 is displayed on the panel image C121IW117, and the panel image D121IW118 is displayed. The icon image “★” 121IW 121 is displayed.

  Next, when the player operates the push button 31B once, as shown in FIG. 20-43 (D), the leading panel image A121IW115 is erased, and the panel image B121IW116 is displayed at the beginning. .

  Next, when the player continuously presses the push button 31B and the number of times of continuous hitting reaches a first predetermined number (for example, 10 times), the leading panel image B121IW116 is erased as shown in FIG. 20-44 (E). The panel image C121IW117 is displayed at the top.

  Next, when the player continuously presses the push button 31B and the number of times of continuous hitting reaches the second predetermined number (for example, 20 times), the leading panel image C121 IW 117 is erased as shown in FIG. 20-44 (F). Only the panel image D121IW118 is displayed.

  After that, at the development timing of the super reach, as shown in FIG. 20-44 (G), a display is made such that the panel image D121IW118 left last is enlarged over the entire display screen of the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. As shown in 44 (H), the rendering of the aspect developing into the super reach D is executed.

  In the examples shown in FIGS. 20-43 and 20-44, the icon image “★” 121 IW 121 is displayed on the panel image D 121 IW 118 that is finally displayed at the top, so that the current setting value is It is suggested that the possibility of being "3" is high.

  In the examples shown in FIGS. 20-43 and 20-44, the execution of Super Reach D is determined. However, for example, when the execution of Super Reach A is determined, the push button is displayed. Even when 31B is operated, the panel image A121IW115 shown in FIG. 20-43 (C) remains unchanged at the top, and the panel image A121IW115 is displayed on the image display device 5 at the super reach development timing. The display of the aspect which expands to the whole screen is made, and the presentation of the aspect which develops to super reach A is performed. Also, for example, when execution of super reach B is determined, even if the push button 31B is operated, the panel image B121IW116 shown in FIG. 20-43 (D) is changed only to the state where it is displayed at the beginning. Instead, at the development timing of the super reach, display of a mode in which the panel image B 121 IW 116 expands on the entire display screen of the image display device 5 is performed, and effects of a mode of developing to the super reach B are performed. Also, for example, when execution of the super reach C is determined, even if the push button 31B is operated, the panel image C121IW117 shown in FIG. Instead, at the development timing of the super reach, display of a mode in which the panel image C121IW 117 is enlarged over the entire display screen of the image display device 5 is performed, and an effect of a mode of developing to the super reach C is executed.

  Also, for example, although execution of the super reach D is determined, the player does not operate the push button 31B at all or does not continuously hit the second predetermined number, as shown in FIG. 20-44 (F). It is also conceivable that there is no change to the state in which only the panel image D121IW 118 is displayed. In this case, in this example, if the push button 31B is operated at least once, the panel image B121IW116 and the panel image C121IW117 are forcibly deleted and the panel image D121IW118 is displayed at the top. Develop into Super Reach D. However, if the push button 31B is not operated even once and the panel image A121IW115 is displayed at the top, in this example, the panel image A121IW115 remains unchanged at the top. Developed into Super Reach A without.

  In addition to the mode shown in the present example, for example, even if the push button 31B is not operated even once, it may be configured to be forcibly developed into the super reach D. In addition, even when execution of Super Reach D is determined, if the state does not change to the state where only the panel image 121 IW 118 is displayed, the panel image finally displayed at the top is displayed. May be configured to develop into Super Reach B and Super Reach C.

  In addition, for example, when the player does not operate the push button 31B, it may be configured to develop into a super reach having nothing to do with the suggestion of the setting value.

  In the examples illustrated in FIGS. 20-43 and 20-44, the icon images 121IW 119 to 121 are displayed and the suggestion effect is executed during the reach, but for example, the icon pattern 1 is determined and the suggestion is indicated during the reach When it is determined that the effect is not performed, only the panel images are displayed in FIGS. 20-43 (C) to 20-44 (G), and the icon image is not displayed.

  In this example, the case where the icon image is not displayed at all when the suggestion effect during the reach is not executed during the super reach is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. For example, when the suggestion effect during the reach is not performed, an item image having nothing to do with the setting value may be displayed on each panel image, and thus there may be no relation to the suggestion of the setting value. .

  Further, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 20-43 and 20-44, the panel image is erased one by one in response to the operation of the push button 31B, whereby the stage of super reach effect is one by one. Although the case of suggesting the set value in the staging of the rising aspect has been shown, the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. For example, when displaying a meter display that raises the level of the meter stepwise according to the player's operation, an icon image or telop display corresponding to the setting value is displayed to indicate the setting value. It is also good. Further, for example, the reach effect itself such as the super reach does not change stepwise, and only the icon image or telop display corresponding to the setting value changes stepwise according to the player's operation. May be Further, for example, it is not necessary to accompany the operation of the player, and the icon image or telop display corresponding to the set value may be changed stepwise without regard to the operation, and various presentation modes are provided. Conceivable.

  Further, for example, the in-reach suggestion effect and the display result of the variable display as shown in FIGS. 20-43 and 20-44 may be associated with each other. For example, when a big hit occurs in the fluctuation display when the in-reach suggestion effect as shown in FIGS. 20-43 and 20-44 is executed, the setting value suggested in the in-reach suggestion effect is determined, Alternatively, it may be configured to be determined to be equal to or higher than the set value suggested by the suggested effect during reach.

  Further, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 20-43 (C) to 20-44 (E), icon images are displayed visibly also for panel images other than the panel image displayed at the top. Although the case is shown, the present invention is not limited to such an aspect, and only the panel image displayed at the top may be configured to be in the state where the icon image is displayed. In this case, for example, in FIG. 20-43 (C), since the panel image A121IW115 is displayed at the top, the panel images B121IW116 to D121IW118 are all displayed with no icon image displayed. 20-43 (D), when the panel image A121IW115 is erased and the panel image B121IW116 is displayed at the top, the icon image 121IW119 is displayed on the panel image B121IW116. Then, when the panel image B121IW116 is erased and the panel image C121IW117 is displayed at the top in FIG. 20-44 (E), the icon image 121IW120 is displayed in the panel image C121IW117. Then, when the panel image C121IW117 is erased and only the panel image D121IW118 is displayed in FIG. 20-44 (F), the icon image 121IW121 is displayed on the panel image D121IW118. May be

  Also, in this example, for example, although the execution of the super reach D is determined, the player does not continuously hit the push button 31B to the second predetermined number until the panel image D121 IW 118 is displayed. If it has not changed, if the push button 31B is operated at least once, the panel image B121IW116 and the panel image C121IW117 are forcibly deleted and the panel image D121IW118 is displayed at the top. However, when the icon image is displayed only for the panel image displayed at the beginning as described above, the panel image B121IW116 and the panel image C121IW117 do not have timing to be displayed at the beginning. Image B121IW116 or panel image C121IW View 17 of icon images may be constructed so as not. In addition, even when the panel image B121IW116 or the panel image C121IW117 is forcibly deleted, the panel image B121IW116 or the panel image C121IW117 is displayed in order only for an extremely short time (for example, 1 second), so that it is extremely short. The icon image may be displayed on the panel image B121IW116 or the panel image C121IW117 only for a time (for example, one second).

  In the feature portion 121IW, a character effect and a light guide plate effect are executed in a mode in which it is difficult to recognize a big hit in a big hit, but for example, an error displayed on the image display device 9 when an error occurs. The display is also performed by the aspect which makes it hard to recognize the big hit inside suggestion production. That is, the error display is displayed prior to the jackpot suggestion (or the pre-game suggestion or the in-game suggestion). With such a configuration, the occurrence of an error can be appropriately notified. Also, in the case where a predetermined effect (for example, one of a specific effect aspect among fanfare effects) is provided that can be executed simultaneously with the big hit during suggested effects, and the predetermined effect is a mode that makes it hard to recognize the big hit during indicated effects To give priority to the jackpot suggestion effect. Specifically, when the image displayed on the image display device 5 by the predetermined effect is a mode in which it is difficult to recognize the image displayed by the big hit during the suggestion, the big hit is displayed by the suggestion during the hit Images may be displayed preferentially. By such a configuration, it is possible to make it easy to recognize the jackpot suggestion effect.

  Further, in the feature portion 121IW, the decorative symbol is variably displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, but the decorative symbol is variably displayed by driving the drum-like movable body having the decorative symbol on the surface. (That is, it may be applied to a so-called drum-type gaming machine). Alternatively, the decorative symbol may be variably displayed by driving a belt-like movable body having the decorative symbol on the surface (that is, it may be applied to a so-called belt reel type gaming machine). In such a drum-type or belt-reel-type game machine, at the start of the first change after the setting change, the drum-like or belt-like movable body performs a characteristic operation different from that at the normal time (or the feature Behavior may occur). Therefore, in the first change after the setting change, the light guide effect to make it difficult to visually recognize the movable body at the start of the change may be performed (or the ratio to be performed may be increased). Such a configuration can make it difficult for the player to notice that the setting change has been made.

  In addition, in the feature portion 121IW, the feature effect and the light guide plate effect are configured to be able to reduce the visibility of the suggestion effect during the big hit, but in place of or in addition to such a configuration, For example, by executing the feature effect and the light guide plate effect, it may be possible to reduce the visibility of the initial outcome effect, the pre-game suggestion effect, and the in-game suggestion effect. Also in this case, the visibility may be reduced at a high rate when a suggestion that is undesirable for the player is made. For example, when even-numbered initial appearances are displayed, or when the pre-game suggestion effect of the first effect mode is executed, or when the during-game suggestion effect of the first effect mode is executed, the visibility thereof is reduced. In order to make it possible, it is possible to increase the ratio of performing the character effect rendering in which the movable member operates, and the light guide plate rendering displaying characters and pictures by the light guide plate. In addition, effects including control to output a predetermined sound, control to vibrate the movable member and the stick controller 31A, and control to emit a decorative light emitting object such as a decorative LED in a predetermined mode, not limited to the feature effect and the light guide plate effect By doing this, the player's attention may be directed to others, and the visibility of the initial appearance effect, the pre-game suggestion effect, and the in-game suggestion effect may be reduced (or less noticeable).

  Moreover, in addition to the setting indication effect of the main feature portion 121IW, a simultaneous effect to be executed based on the measurement result (measurement result using a measurement timer set at power on or a real time clock) is executed in a specific mode. Setting may be suggested.

  In addition, according to the number of times that the variable display is continuously executed without the pending storage becoming 0, or the number of occurrences of the start winning exceeding the upper limit pending storage number, a setting suggestion effect that suggests setting (for example, a predetermined image Display control, output control of a predetermined sound, light emission control of a predetermined lamp, and the like may be performed.

  In addition, a setting suggestion effect that suggests setting based on detection of an operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B in a predetermined operation valid period (for example, display control of a predetermined image or output control of a predetermined sound, predetermined The light emission control and the like of the lamp may be performed.

  As described above, the characteristic portion 121IW has been described with reference to the drawings, but the specific configuration is not limited to that shown in the present embodiment, and changes or additions may be made without departing from the scope of the present invention. included.

(Modification 1)
For example, although the feature part 121IW exemplifies a form in which the security cover 121IW500A is fixed to the outer frame 121IW001a, the present invention is not limited to this, and the security cover is provided on the gaming machine frame 121IW003 side It is also good. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 20-45 (A) and 20-45 (B) as the first modification, for example, the security cover 121IW500B including the short piece 121IW500Ba and the long piece 121IW500Bb is used for the substrate case 121IW201, for example. The right end of the long piece 121IW500Bb slides in the lateral direction between the covering position covering the right side of the substrate case 121IW201 including the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 and the covering releasing position on the right side of the covering position Make it moveable.

  On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is opened, the security cover 121IW500B is slid to the right with respect to the substrate case 121IW201 to set through the through hole 121IW500Bc formed in the left portion of the long piece 121IW500Bb. The key 121IW051 and the setting change switch 121IW052 may be operated. That is, in the first modification, when the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is closed, the security cover 121IW500B (long piece 121IW500Bb) covers the setting key 121IW051 and the setting change switch 121IW052 in the left-right direction with respect to the substrate case 121IW201. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is maintained in the restricted state by restricting the slide movement to the lower side. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is opened, the security cover 121IW500B is slid to the right with respect to the substrate case 121IW201 to release the state where the setting key 121IW051 and the setting switch 121IW052 are covered. The pachinko gaming machine 1 can be in a state where it can be released from the regulated state (it can be changed to the allowed state).

  More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 20-45 (A) and 20-45 (B), when the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is closed, the projecting dimension of the security cover 121IW500B from the substrate case 121IW201 is the length L1. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is opened, the projection size of the security cover 121IW500B from the substrate case 121IW201 is extended to the length L2 by sliding the security cover 121IW500B relative to the substrate case 121IW201. (L2> L1).

  That is, as shown in FIG. 20-46 (A), when the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is pivoted about the predetermined pivoting axis and opened, the projected size of the security cover 121IW500B from the substrate case 121IW201 is By sliding the board case 121IW201 to the length L2 (by setting the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the permitted state), a clerk at the game arcade etc. operates the setting key 121IW051 and the setting change switch 121IW052 for pachinko gaming The set value of machine 1 can be changed. On the other hand, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the permitted state, as shown in FIG. 20-46 (B), the security cover 121IW500B is used as the substrate case 121IW201 until the projecting dimension from the substrate case 121IW201 becomes the length L1. If the slide movement is not performed (if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not changed to the restricted state), the security cover 121IW500B abuts on the front end of the outer frame 121IW001a, making it impossible to close the gaming machine frame 121IW003 It has become.

  Therefore, in the first modification, since it is possible to prevent closing of the gaming machine frame 121IW003 while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the permitted state, the setting key 121IW051 by the security cover 121IW500B is set. It is possible to prevent the cover with the change-over switch 121IW052, that is, closing the gaming machine frame 121IW003 without restricting the operation on the operation unit, and the security can be improved.

  In the state where the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is closed, the front end of the short piece 121IW500Ba is disposed between the outer frame 121IW001a and the gaming machine frame 121IW003, whereby movement from the covering position in the lateral direction is restricted. The security cover 121IW500B may be moved in the lateral direction within a range in which the setting cover 121IW051 and the setting change switch 121IW052 are covered by the security cover 121IW500B. .

(Modification 2)
Furthermore, as an embodiment in which the security cover is provided on the gaming machine frame 121IW003 side, as shown in FIGS. 20-47 (A) and 20-47 (B) as a second modification, the left end of the security cover 121IW500C The covering position for covering the right side portion of the substrate case 121IW201 including the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 is pivoted from the covering position around the pivot 121IW500Cd which is provided on the back side of the frame 121IW003 and which points vertically It may be pivotally supported between the covering release position. In such a case, when the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is closed, the front end of the short piece 121IW500Ca is locked to the locking portion 121IW500Cc provided on the right side of the outer frame 121IW001a, and the long piece 121IW500Cb is switched to the setting key 121IW051 The switch 121 IW 052 may be restricted from pivoting to the back side from the state of covering from the back side.

  When the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is opened, the setting cover 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 are turned by rotating the security cover 121IW500C around the pivot 121IW500Cd (counterclockwise in plan view) with respect to the substrate case 121IW201. It should just be able to operate by releasing the state where it covered. That is, in the second modification, when the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is closed, the rotation is restricted in a state where the security cover 121IW500C (long piece 121IW500Cb) covers the setting key 121IW051 and the setting change switch 121IW052. Thus, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is maintained in a regulated state. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is opened, the security cover 121IW500C is rotated about the pivot 121IW500Cd (counterclockwise in plan view) with respect to the substrate case 121IW201 to set the setting key 121IW051 and the setting switch 121IW052. By releasing the covered state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be released from the restricted state (can be changed to the allowed state).

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 20-48 (A), the security cover 121IW500C in the present modification 2 is pivoted around the pivot 121IW500Cd (the pachinko gaming machine 1 is allowed to be in the permitted state), so that The store clerk or the like can change the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by operating the setting key 121IW051 or the setting change switch 121IW052. On the other hand, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the permitted state, as shown in FIG. 20-48 (B), the security cover 121IW500C is rotated clockwise in plan view, and the setting key is set by the security cover 121IW500C. If 121IW051 or setting change switch 121IW052 is not covered (unless pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed to the restricted state), security cover 121IW500C abuts on the front end of outer frame 121IW001a and closes gaming machine frame 121IW003. It has become impossible.

  Therefore, in the second modification, since it is possible to prevent closing of the gaming machine frame 121IW003 while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the permitted state, the setting key 121IW051 by the security cover 121IW500C is set. It is possible to prevent the cover with the change-over switch 121IW052, that is, closing the gaming machine frame 121IW003 without restricting the operation on the operation unit, and the security can be improved.

(Modification 3)
Further, although the feature portion 121IW exemplifies a mode in which the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed by opening the gaming machine frame 121IW003, the present invention is not limited to this, and a glass door frame The setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be changeable by opening the 121 IW 003 a. When the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed by opening the glass door frame 121IW003a in this manner, as shown in FIGS. 20-49 (A) to 20-49 (C) as the third modification. As described above, the through hole 121IW003b may be formed in the lower portion of the gaming machine frame 121IW003, and the setting key 121IW051 and the setting change switch 121IW052 may be operable through the through hole 121IW003b. In this case, the mounting surface of the IC or the like on the main substrate 11 is disposed toward the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 are on the opposite side of the mounting surface on the main substrate 11. Placed on the face.

  As described above, when the setting key 121IW051 or the setting change switch 121IW052 can be operated through the through hole 121IW003b, the door 121IW003c capable of opening and closing the through hole 121IW003b is provided, and the door 121IW003c is closed. Thus, the operation of the setting key 121IW051 or the setting changeover switch 121IW052 may be restricted. When the door 121IW003c is provided on the front side of the gaming machine frame 121IW003 as shown in FIGS. 20-49 (B) and 20-49 (C), the door is closed by closing the glass door frame 121IW003a. Since the 121IW003c is held between the glass door frame 121IW003a and the gaming machine frame 121IW003 in an openable / closable manner, the setting key 121IW051 or the setting changeover switch 121IW052 is improperly operated when the glass door frame 121IW003a is closed. Can be strongly prevented and security can be improved.

(Modification 4)
In this feature part 121 IW, although the case where a setting value is suggested by changing the presentation stage after the end of the small hit game and switching to the background image according to the changed presentation stage was shown, it changes after the end of the small hit game The pattern table may be switched, and a set value may be suggested by performing a series of set value indication effects across a plurality of variable displays. Hereinafter, the modification 4 which switches a fluctuation pattern table after the end of a small hitting game is explained.

  In the fourth modification, when the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) ends the small hit game, specifically, in the small hit end process (step S120) in the special symbol process process, A small hit after flag indicating that the small hit game is over will be set.

  FIG. 20-50 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern setting process (step S111) according to the fourth modification. In the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 confirms whether the small hit after flag is set or not (step 121 IWS 1101). If the small hit after flag is not set (ie, after the end of the small hit game), the CPU 103 is a table for determining the fluctuation pattern, whether it is a big hit or not, a small hit or not, a big hit A variation pattern determination table corresponding to the type and small hit type is selected (step 121 IWS 1102). Then, the process proceeds to step 121IWS1107.

  If the small hit after flag is set (that is, after the end of the small hit game), the CPU 103 sets the value of the small hit after number counter to count the number of changes after the small hit game is over. It adds (step 121 IWS1103). In addition, the CPU 103 selects, as a table for determining a variation pattern, a variation pattern determination table for small hitting (step 121 IWS 1104).

  Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the small hitting after number counter is a predetermined value (for example, 3) (step 121IWS1105). If the value of the small hitting after number counter does not reach a predetermined value, the process proceeds to step 121IWS1107. If the value of the small hit after counter is a predetermined value, the CPU 103 resets the small hit after flag and resets (zero clears) the small hit after counter (step 121 IWS 1106). Then, the process proceeds to step 121IWS1107.

  Then, the CPU 103 performs a lottery process based on random numbers using the variation pattern determination table selected in step 121 IWS 1102 and 1104 to determine a variation pattern (step 121 IWS 1107).

  In the fourth modification, the processing of step 121 IWS 1103 to S1107 is executed, and after the small hitting game is over, until the variation display for a predetermined value (for example, the variable display of 3 times) is finished, the small hitting is only dedicated The variation pattern of is determined. In this example, it is assumed that a fixed fluctuation pattern is determined with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds as a fluctuation pattern dedicated to small hits.

  In addition to the mode shown in this example, for example, even before the end of the variable display for a predetermined value after the end of the small hit game, if it is a big hit or small hit, it will be for big hit or small It may be configured to determine a change pattern for hit.

  Next, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the effect control command (the change pattern command) corresponding to the determined change pattern to the effect control CPU 120 (step 121 IWS 1108).

  Next, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time corresponding to the selected fluctuation pattern to the fluctuation time timer formed in the RAM 102 (step 121IWS1109). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (step S112) (step 121IWS1110).

  FIG. 20-51 is a flowchart illustrating the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the fourth modification. In the fourth modification, the process of step 121IWS601 to S602 is the same as the process shown in FIG. Step 121 If the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is determined in IWS 602, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern command read in step 121 IWS 601 is a variation pattern dedicated for small hitting (Step 121 IWS 631). If it is a variation pattern for small hits only, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the number-of-plays counter to count the number of effects for the small hits after the small hits suggesting the set value after the small hit game is over. It adds (step 121 IWS 632).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the value of the effect number counter after the addition is 1 (step 121 IWS 633). If the value of the effect frequency counter is not 1 (that is, in the case of performing the second and subsequent variable display after the small hitting game is over), it proceeds to step 121IWS636 as it is. If the value of the effect frequency counter is 1 (ie, if performing the first variable display after the small hitting game is over), the effect control CPU 120 is a small for determining the type of after-small hit suggestion effect The lottery process based on the random number is performed using the hit after suggestion effect determination table, and the type of the after hitting small after hit effect is determined (step 121 IWS 634). Then, the effect control CPU 120 causes the storage area provided in the RAM 122 to store the type of the after-small indication effect suggested (step 121IWS 635).

  FIG. 20: A-FIG. 52 are explanatory drawings which show the example of the small hit after suggestion production determination table. As shown in FIG. 20-52, in this example, there are three types of post-small hit suggestion effects 1 to 3 as types of post-small hit suggestion effects. In this example, the small hit post suggestion effect changes the first time, the second time, and the third time over a plurality of variable displays (for example, for a total of 90 seconds of 3 variable displays fixed at 30 seconds after a small hit). It is configured as a series of effects executed in such a manner that the story is developed in order as the display is executed. Among them, after the small hit suggestion effect 1, a series of effects are performed, and the effect that suggests that the set value is finally "1" (for example, battle effect is performed over a plurality of changes, the last third change An effect in which a character reminiscent of the setting value “1” wins in the battle). In addition, after the small hitting suggestion effect 2, a series of effects are executed, the effect which suggests that it is the setting value "2" finally (for example, the battle effect is executed over a plurality of changes, and set in the last 3rd change An effect in which a character reminiscent of a value “2” wins in a battle). In addition, after the small hitting suggestion effect 3, a series of effects are executed, the effect which suggests that it is the setting value "3" finally (for example, the battle effect is executed over a plurality of changes, and set in the last 3rd change An effect in which a character reminiscent of a value “3” wins in a battle).

  As shown in FIG. 20-52, in this example, when the setting value is “1”, the proportion in which the small hitting after-sentence rendering 1 is selected is high, and when the setting value is “2”, the small hitting after In the case where the proportion for which the suggestion effect 2 is selected is high, and the setting value is “3”, the proportion for which the post-small hitting suggestion effect 3 is selected is high.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the variation pattern and the type of the after-small indication hit effect determined (step 121IWS636). In this case, if it is the first variable display after the small hitting game is over (in the case of Y in step 121 IWS 633), the small hitting after the small hitting determined in step 121 IWS 634 and stored in the RAM 122 in step 121 IWS 635 Select a process table. Also, if it is the second variable display after the small hitting game is over (in the case of N in step 121 IWS 633), the type of the small hitting after suggestion determined in the first variable display after the small hitting game is Since it is a habit stored in the RAM 122, a process table according to the type is selected for the after-small hit suggestion stored in the RAM 122. Then, the process proceeds to step 121IWS617. Note that the processing after step 121IWS 617 is the same as the processing shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is not a variation pattern dedicated for small hit after (N in step 121 IWS 631), the CPU 120 for effect control resets (0 clears) the effect number counter (step 121 IWS 637). And it transfers to step 121 IWS603. The processes after step 121IWS603 are the same as those shown in FIG.

  In this example, after the end of the small hit game, the variable display is fixed for 30 seconds over 3 changes, and a series of small hit after suggestion effects are executed in a total of 90 seconds, but the small hit after suggestion effects The number of changes and the period of execution are not limited to those shown in this example. For example, after the end of the small hit game, the variable display may be fixed for 20 seconds over 4 changes, and a series of small hit after suggestion effects may be executed for a total of 80 seconds.

As described above, the present characterizing portion 121IW includes the first invention described below. That is, in the related art, a pachinko configured to be able to set any of the setting values among a plurality of setting values based on the setting operation and configured to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the setting values being set. As a gaming machine, for example, there is one described in JP-A-2010-200902. JP-A-2010-200902 describes that display control of effects based on set values is performed, and processing of displaying each character image of giraffe, elephant, and lion is performed at a predetermined timing. The predetermined timing may be, for example, when the special symbol fluctuates, but it may be periodic (when all fluctuations, every predetermined number of fluctuations, etc.) or irregularly (when winning by random number lottery, etc.) It is stated that there may be. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, the rendering effect can not always be enhanced in the gaming machine configured to be able to execute control of the advantageous state based on the set value set. . Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of the means 1 of the first invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (eg, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player,
Setting means (for example, steps in the game control microcomputer 100) which can be set to any setting value among a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value "1" to setting value "3") based on setting operation 121 IWS 029),
Advantage state control means (for example, a portion for executing steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing control relating to the advantage state based on the set value set;
Special state control means (for example, a portion for executing steps S118 to S120 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small hit gaming state) different from the advantageous state;
Specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect (for example, effect by changing the effect stage) based on being controlled to the special state (for example, a portion for executing steps 121IWS1008 to S1011 in the effect control CPU 120) Equipped with
The specific effect execution means executes the specific effect at different execution rates according to the set value set (for example, the effect control CPU 120 sets in step 121 IWS 1009 as shown in FIG. 20-38) Determine the presence or absence of the change of the presentation stage at different rates depending on the value)
According to this feature, in the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value set, the control to the special state by the specific effect is described. Can be made to pay attention to, and the effect can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 2 of the first invention,
The special state control means can be controlled to a plurality of types of special states (for example, a small hit gaming state based on the small hit types A to C),
The specific effect execution means executes the specific effect in a mode that suggests the set value being set (for example, as shown in FIG. 20-38, the setting value “1” is suggested by being changed to the effect stage A And the setting value “2” is suggested by changing to the rendering stage B, and the setting value “3” is suggested by changing to the rendering stage C),
Depending on the type of the special state controlled, the reliability of the suggestion of the setting value by execution of the specific effect is different (for example, as shown in FIG. 20-38, the end of the small hit game based on the small hit type C) The suggestion of the setting value by the rendering stage changed later is the highest in reliability, and the suggestion of the setting value by the presentation stage changed after the small hitting game based on the small hitting type A is the lowest in reliability ing)
It is described that it may be carried out, According to such composition, a stage effect can be heightened.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 3 of the first invention,
The specific effect execution means is
There are cases where specific effects are performed or not performed depending on the mode of shifting the effect state after ending the special state (for example, as shown in FIG. 20-38, the cases where the effect stage is changed or not changed) There),
Depending on the set value being set, the rate at which the specific effect is executed differs depending on the mode in which the effect state is shifted after ending the special state (for example, as shown in FIG. 20-38, the set value “1” Depending on which one of “3” is selected, there is no change or a change in the effect stage (the ratio determined to change to effect stage A, change to effect stage B, change to effect stage C) differs)
It is described that it may be carried out, According to such composition, a stage effect can be heightened.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 4 of the first invention,
The specific effect execution means changes the ratio of executing the specific effect depending on the mode of transitioning to the specific effect state among a plurality of effect states after ending the special state according to the set value being set (for example, FIG. As shown in 20-38, it may be changed to the effect stage C only when the setting value is "3")
It is described that it may be carried out, According to such composition, a stage effect can be heightened.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 5 of the first invention,
Variable display pattern determination means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100) for determining a variable display pattern using variable display pattern determination data (for example, a variation pattern determination table) for determining a variable display pattern (for example, a variation pattern) Step in FIG. 12) IWS 1101 to S1107),
And a variable display execution unit (for example, a portion for executing steps 171 to 173 in the effect control CPU 120) that executes variable display in accordance with the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination unit.
The variable display pattern determination means switches the variable display pattern determination data after ending the special state to determine the variable display pattern (for example, when the microcomputer 100 for gaming control is Y in step 121 IWS 1101, steps 121 IWS 1103-S 1107 To do),
The specific effect execution means executes a series of specific effects in a mode that suggests the set value that has been set over a plurality of variable displays (for example, the effect control CPU 120 performs step 121 IWS 632 to S 636 when Y is in step 121 IWS 631). Run)
It is described that it may be carried out, According to such composition, a stage effect can be heightened.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 6 of the first invention,
Information output means capable of outputting setting value information (for example, setting value command) capable of specifying which setting value is set (for example, a portion for executing step 121 IWS031, S108 in the game control microcomputer 100) ,
Based on the set value information input from the information output means, suggestive effect execution means (eg, for effect control) that can execute suggested effects (eg, pre-game suggested effects, in-game suggested effects, big hit suggested effects) And a step of executing steps 121 IWS 509 to S 515, S 704 to S 709, and S 901 to S 906 in the CPU 120,
The suggestion effect executing means is
The 1st indication effect (for example, the indication before the game with the 3rd effect aspect and the indication during the game with the 3rd effect aspect and the big hit indication with the 4th effect aspect) and the 2nd indication effect (for example, the game with the 1st appearance aspect) as the indication effect It is possible to execute pre-suggestion production, suggestion production during game, big hit suggestion production)),
When the set value information is not properly input, the second suggestion effect can be performed as the indication effect without executing the first indication effect as the indication effect (for example, the CPU 120 for effect control) By performing step 121 IWS 514, S 709, S 906, the pre-game suggestion effect according to the third effect mode, the suggestion effect during game play, and the big hit suggestion effect according to the fourth effect mode are not executed)
It is described that it may be described that, according to such a configuration, in the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that is set, it is possible to prevent the decline in interest for the game can do.

Further, the present characterizing portion 121IW includes a second invention described below. That is, in the related art, a pachinko configured to be able to set any of the setting values among a plurality of setting values based on the setting operation and configured to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the setting values being set. As a gaming machine, for example, there is one described in JP-A-2010-200902. JP-A-2010-200902 describes that display control of effects based on set values is performed, and processing of displaying each character image of giraffe, elephant, and lion is performed at a predetermined timing. The predetermined timing may be, for example, when the special symbol fluctuates, but it may be periodic (when all fluctuations, every predetermined number of fluctuations, etc.) or irregularly (when winning by random number lottery, etc.) It is stated that there may be. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, the rendering effect can not always be enhanced in the gaming machine configured to be able to execute control of the advantageous state based on the set value set. . Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of the means 1 of the second invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine capable of performing variable display and controlling in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to a player,
Setting means (for example, steps in the game control microcomputer 100) which can be set to any setting value among a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value "1" to setting value "3") based on setting operation 121 IWS 029),
Advantage state control means (for example, a portion for executing steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing control relating to the advantage state based on the set value set;
Specific effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) capable of executing specific effects (for example, effects by changing the effect stage) over a plurality of variable displays based on satisfaction of a predetermined condition (for example, occurrence of a small hit) Step 121) and the part that executes IWS 1008 to S1011);
The specific effect execution means executes the specific effect at different execution rates according to the set value set (for example, the effect control CPU 120 sets in step 121 IWS 1009 as shown in FIG. 20-38) Determine the presence or absence of the change of the presentation stage at different rates depending on the value)
According to this feature, in the gaming machine configured to be able to execute control of the advantageous state based on the set value set, the specific effect over plural times of variable display is described. Can be performed, so the presentation effect can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 2 of the second invention,
It comprises special state control means (for example, a portion for executing steps S118 to S120 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of controlling to a plurality of types of special states (for example, small hit types A to C) different from the advantageous state;
The specific effect execution means executes the specific effect in a mode that suggests the set value being set (for example, as shown in FIG. 20-38, the setting value “1” is suggested by being changed to the effect stage A And the setting value “2” is suggested by changing to the rendering stage B, and the setting value “3” is suggested by changing to the rendering stage C),
Depending on the type of the special state controlled, the reliability of the suggestion of the setting value by execution of the specific effect is different (for example, as shown in FIG. 20-38, the end of the small hit game based on the small hit type C) The suggestion of the setting value by the rendering stage changed later is the highest in reliability, and the suggestion of the setting value by the presentation stage changed after the small hitting game based on the small hitting type A is the lowest in reliability ing)
It is described that it may be carried out, According to such composition, a stage effect can be heightened.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 3 of the second invention,
It has special state control means (for example, a portion for executing steps S118 to S120 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small hit gaming state) different from the advantageous state,
The specific effect execution means is
There are cases where the specific effect is performed or not performed depending on the mode of shifting the effect state after ending the special state (e.g., when the effect stage is changed or not as shown in FIG. 20-38) ),
Depending on the set value being set, the rate at which the specific effect is executed differs depending on the mode in which the effect state is shifted after ending the special state (for example, as shown in FIG. 20-38, the set value “1” Depending on which one of “3” is selected, there is no change or a change in the effect stage (the ratio determined to change to effect stage A, change to effect stage B, change to effect stage C) differs)
It is described that it may be carried out, According to such composition, a stage effect can be heightened.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 4 of the second invention,
The specific effect execution means changes the ratio of executing the specific effect depending on the mode of transitioning to the specific effect state among a plurality of effect states after ending the special state according to the set value being set (for example, FIG. As shown in 20-38, it may be changed to the effect stage C only when the setting value is "3")
It is described that it may be carried out, According to such composition, a stage effect can be heightened.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 5 of the second invention,
It has special state control means (for example, a portion for executing steps S118 to S120 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small hit gaming state) different from the advantageous state,
Variable display pattern determination means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100) for determining a variable display pattern using variable display pattern determination data (for example, a variation pattern determination table) for determining a variable display pattern (for example, a variation pattern) Step in FIG. 12) IWS 1101 to S1107),
And a variable display execution unit (for example, a portion for executing steps 171 to 173 in the effect control CPU 120) that executes variable display in accordance with the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination unit.
The variable display pattern determination means switches the variable display pattern determination data after ending the special state to determine a variable display pattern (for example, when the microcomputer 100 for gaming control is Y in step 121 IWS 1101, step 121 IWS 1103 Execute S1107),
The specific effect execution means executes a series of specific effects in a mode that suggests the set value that has been set over a plurality of variable displays (for example, the effect control CPU 120 performs step 121 IWS 632 to S 636 when Y is in step 121 IWS 631). Run)
It is described that it may be carried out, According to such composition, a stage effect can be heightened.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 6 of the second invention,
Information output means capable of outputting setting value information (for example, setting value command) capable of specifying which setting value is set (for example, a portion for executing step 121 IWS031, S108 in the game control microcomputer 100) ,
Based on the set value information input from the information output means, suggestive effect execution means (eg, for effect control) that can execute suggested effects (eg, pre-game suggested effects, in-game suggested effects, big hit suggested effects) And a step of executing steps 121 IWS 509 to S 515, S 704 to S 709, and S 901 to S 906 in the CPU 120,
The suggestion effect executing means is
The 1st indication effect (for example, the indication before the game with the 3rd effect aspect and the indication during the game with the 3rd effect aspect and the big hit indication with the 4th effect aspect) and the 2nd indication effect (for example, the game with the 1st appearance aspect) as the indication effect It is possible to execute pre-suggestion production, suggestion production during game, big hit suggestion production)),
When the set value information is not properly input, the second suggestion effect can be performed as the indication effect without executing the first indication effect as the indication effect (for example, the CPU 120 for effect control) By performing step 121 IWS 514, S 709, S 906, the pre-game suggestion effect according to the third effect mode, the suggestion effect during game play, and the big hit suggestion effect according to the fourth effect mode are not executed)
It is described that it may be described that, according to such a configuration, in the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that is set, it is possible to prevent the decline in interest for the game can do.

Further, the present characterizing portion 121IW includes the third invention described below. That is, in the related art, a pachinko configured to be able to set any of the setting values among a plurality of setting values based on the setting operation and configured to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the setting values being set. As a gaming machine, for example, there is one described in JP-A-2010-200902. JP-A-2010-200902 describes that display control of effects based on set values is performed, and processing of displaying each character image of giraffe, elephant, and lion is performed at a predetermined timing. The predetermined timing may be, for example, when the special symbol fluctuates, but it may be periodic (when all fluctuations, every predetermined number of fluctuations, etc.) or irregularly (when winning by random number lottery, etc.) It is stated that there may be. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, the rendering effect can not always be enhanced in the gaming machine configured to be able to execute control of the advantageous state based on the set value set. . Therefore, as the gaming machine of the means 1 of the third aspect of the invention for solving the problem, when focusing on the problem,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (eg, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player,
Setting means (for example, steps in the game control microcomputer 100) which can be set to any setting value among a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value "1" to setting value "3") based on setting operation 121 IWS 029),
Advantage state control means (for example, a portion for executing steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing control relating to the advantage state based on the set value set;
And an effect execution unit capable of executing an effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120);
The effect executing means is
It is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, pre-reading zone effect) over a predetermined period,
It is possible to execute an effect such that a set value is suggested by establishing a predetermined condition (for example, occurrence of a big hit) during execution of the specific effect (for example, as shown in FIG. If a big hit occurs during execution of the prefetch zone effect by pattern 1, it is suggested that the setting value is “1”, and if a big hit occurs during the execution of prefetch zone effect by the prefetch zone effect pattern 2, the setting value is “2” It is suggested that it is the setting value "3" if a big hit occurs during execution of pre-reading zone effect by pre-reading zone effect pattern 3).
A gaming machine having the above feature is described. According to this feature, in the gaming machine configured to be able to execute control of the advantageous state based on the set value that is set, the rendering effect can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 2 of the third invention,
The effect executing means can execute the effect so that the suggested set value is different according to which timing in the execution of the specific effect the predetermined condition holds (for example, as shown in FIG. 20-28) If the set value “1” is suggested in the second change eye look-ahead zone effect and a big hit is made, the accuracy being the set value “1” is high, and the set value “2” in the third change eye look-ahead zone effect If it is suggested that the jackpot is a big hit, the accuracy of being the setting value “2” is high, and if the setting value “3” is suggested in the look-ahead zone effect of the fourth variation, the setting value “3” Accuracy is high)
It is described that it may be carried out, According to such composition, a stage effect can be heightened.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 3 of the third invention,
Determining means for determining whether or not to control to an advantageous state (for example, a portion that executes step 121 IWS 110 in the game control microcomputer 100);
And a determination unit (for example, a portion that executes step S101 in the gaming control microcomputer 100) that determines whether or not the advantageous state is controlled before the determination by the determination unit.
The effect executing means can execute the specific effect based on the determination result of the determining means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 performs the prefetching based on the symbol designating command in the prefetching advance notice setting process shown in FIG. 20-20). Determine the execution of zone rendition)
It is described that it may be carried out, According to such composition, a stage effect can be heightened.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 4 of the third invention,
Information output means capable of outputting setting value information (for example, setting value command) capable of specifying which setting value is set (for example, a portion for executing step 121 IWS031, S108 in the game control microcomputer 100) ,
Based on the set value information input from the information output means, suggestive effect execution means (eg, for effect control) that can execute suggested effects (eg, pre-game suggested effects, in-game suggested effects, big hit suggested effects) And a step of executing steps 121 IWS 509 to S 515, S 704 to S 709, and S 901 to S 906 in the CPU 120,
The suggestion effect executing means is
The 1st indication effect (for example, the indication before the game with the 3rd effect aspect and the indication during the game with the 3rd effect aspect and the big hit indication with the 4th effect aspect) and the 2nd indication effect (for example, the game with the 1st appearance aspect) as the indication effect It is possible to execute pre-suggestion production, suggestion production during game, big hit suggestion production)),
When the set value information is not properly input, the second suggestion effect can be performed as the indication effect without executing the first indication effect as the indication effect (for example, the CPU 120 for effect control) By performing step 121 IWS 514, S 709, S 906, the pre-game suggestion effect according to the third effect mode, the suggestion effect during game play, and the big hit suggestion effect according to the fourth effect mode are not executed)
It is described that it may be described that, according to such a configuration, in the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that is set, it is possible to prevent the decline in interest for the game can do.

Further, the present characterizing portion 121IW includes a fourth invention shown below. That is, in the related art, a pachinko configured to be able to set any of the setting values among a plurality of setting values based on the setting operation and configured to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the setting values being set. As a gaming machine, for example, there is one described in JP-A-2010-200902. JP-A-2010-200902 describes that display control of effects based on set values is performed, and processing of displaying each character image of giraffe, elephant, and lion is performed at a predetermined timing. The predetermined timing may be, for example, when the special symbol fluctuates, but it may be periodic (when all fluctuations, every predetermined number of fluctuations, etc.) or irregularly (when winning by random number lottery, etc.) It is stated that there may be. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, the rendering effect can not always be enhanced in the gaming machine configured to be able to execute control of the advantageous state based on the set value set. . Therefore, as the gaming machine of the means 1 of the fourth aspect of the invention for solving the problem, when focusing on the problem,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (eg, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player,
Setting means (for example, steps in the game control microcomputer 100) which can be set to any setting value among a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value "1" to setting value "3") based on setting operation 121 IWS 029),
Advantage state control means (for example, a portion for executing steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing control relating to the advantage state based on the set value set;
Motion detection means (for example, push button 31B) capable of detecting the motion of the player;
Instructed effect execution means (for example, step 121 IWS603 to S605 in the CPU for effect control 120) can be executed that can execute the suggested effect (for example, the in-reach suggested effect) that suggests the set value that has been set. Selecting the corresponding process table and executing step 121 IWS 618, S805);
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect in a mode in which the suggested setting value is changed in response to the action detection means detecting the action of the player a plurality of times (for example, for effect control The CPU 120 executes steps 121 IWS 806 to S 817)
A gaming machine having the above feature is described. According to this feature, in the gaming machine configured to be able to execute control of the advantageous state based on the set value that is set, the rendering effect can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 2 of the fourth invention,
Reach production execution means capable of executing reach production (for example, super reach) (for example, a part that selects a process table according to super reach in step 121 IWS 616 in the CPU for effect control 120 and executes step 121 IWS 618, S805)
An effect can be executed such that the reach effect to be executed changes in stages (for example, as shown in FIG. 20-43 (C) to FIG. 20-44 (F), according to the operation of the push button 31B) Panel images are erased one by one),
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect by changing the setting value suggested at the timing when the reach effect to be executed is changed stepwise (for example, FIG. 20-43 (C) to FIG. 20- As shown in 44 (F), panel images on which icon images 121 IW 119 to 120 suggesting setting values are displayed are erased one by one)
It is described that it may be carried out, According to such composition, a stage effect can be heightened.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 3 of the fourth invention,
The suggestive effect executing means may or may not execute the suggestive effect when performing the effect such that the reach effect to be executed changes in stages (for example, FIGS. 20-26 and 20-). As shown in 27, there are cases where icon patterns 2 to 9 in which the icon image is displayed are selected, and icon pattern 1 in which the icon image is not displayed is selected.
It is described that it may be carried out, According to such composition, a stage effect can be heightened.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 4 of the fourth invention,
Depending on the combination of the set value and the reach effect suggested by the suggested effect, the reliability of the reach effect is different (for example, as shown in FIG. 20-26 (A), when the set value is “1”) When icon pattern 2 is selected, it is decided that it is a big hit)
It is described that it may be carried out, According to such composition, a stage effect can be heightened.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 5 of the fourth invention,
According to the combination of the setting value suggested by the suggestion effect and the reach effect, the reliability of the setting value suggested by the suggestion effect is different (for example, as shown in FIG. 20-26 and FIG. 200-27, Super When the icon image by the icon pattern 9 is displayed in the reach, the expectation for the setting value “3” is high)
It is described that it may be carried out, According to such composition, a stage effect can be heightened.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 6 of the fourth invention,
Information output means (for example, a portion for executing step 121 IWS031 and S108 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of outputting setting value information (for example, setting value command) capable of specifying which setting value is set Equipped
Suggested effect execution means is
Based on the set value information input from the information output means, it is possible to execute suggestion effects (eg, pre-game suggestion effects, in-game suggestion effects, big hit suggestion effects) (eg, steps in the production control CPU 120) 121 IWS 509 to S515, S704 to S709, and S901 to S906),
The 1st indication effect (for example, the indication before the game with the 3rd effect aspect and the indication during the game with the 3rd effect aspect and the big hit indication with the 4th effect aspect) and the 2nd indication effect (for example, the game with the 1st appearance aspect) as the indication effect It is possible to execute pre-suggestion production, suggestion production during game, big hit suggestion production)),
When the set value information is not properly input, the second suggestion effect can be performed as the indication effect without executing the first indication effect as the indication effect (for example, the CPU 120 for effect control) By performing step 121 IWS 514, S 709, S 906, the pre-game suggestion effect according to the third effect mode, the suggestion effect during game play, and the big hit suggestion effect according to the fourth effect mode are not executed)
It is described that it may be described that, according to such a configuration, in the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that is set, it is possible to prevent the decline in interest for the game can do.

Further, the present characterizing portion 121IW includes a fifth invention shown below. That is, in the related art, a pachinko configured to be able to set any of the setting values among a plurality of setting values based on the setting operation and configured to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the setting values being set. As a gaming machine, for example, there is one described in JP-A-2010-200902. In JP 2010-200902 A, a change stop command (a set value specification command) corresponding to a set value before and after change is transmitted from the main control board to the effect control board, and before and after change obtained by the change stop command It is described that display by three types of effect patterns corresponding to three types of characters of giraffe, elephant, and lion is performed based on the value. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a possibility that an erroneous suggestion effect will be executed when the setting value information (setting value specification command) is not normal. In the gaming machine configured to be able to execute control of the advantageous state based on the set value being set, there is a possibility that the interest for the game may be reduced. Therefore, as the gaming machine of the means 1 of the fifth aspect of the invention for solving the problem, when focusing on the problem,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (eg, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player,
Setting means (for example, steps in the game control microcomputer 100) which can be set to any setting value among a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value "1" to setting value "3") based on setting operation 121 IWS 029),
Game control means capable of executing control of the advantageous state based on the set value set (for example, a portion for executing steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100);
Information output means capable of outputting setting value information (for example, setting value command) capable of specifying which setting value is set (for example, a portion for executing step 121 IWS031, S108 in the game control microcomputer 100) ,
Based on the set value information output from the information output means, suggestive effect execution means (for example, for effect control) that can execute suggested effects (for example, pre-game suggested effects, in-game suggested effects, big hit suggested effects) And a step of executing steps 121 IWS 509 to S 515, S 704 to S 709, and S 901 to S 906 in the CPU 120,
When the set value information output from the information output means is not normal, the suggested effect execution means is set to a predetermined set value having a low degree of advantage for the player among the set values of the plurality of stages. As said thing, the said suggestion effect can be performed (for example, CPU120 for production control, the part which performs step 121IWS512, S707, S904)
According to this feature, in the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value set, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest for the game. be able to.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 2 of the fifth invention,
The information output means can output the set value information at a plurality of timings (for example, by executing step 121 IWS 031, S 108, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits the set value command at the time of power on and at the start of fluctuation) Do)
It is described that it may be possible, and according to such a configuration, even if the setting value information can not be input properly at a certain timing, the setting value information can be normally input at the next timing. It is possible to prevent the decline in

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 3 of the fifth invention,
Suggested effect execution means, as a suggested effect, the first suggested effect with a high degree of specification of the set value that has been set (for example, suggested play during the game according to the third effect mode or during the game suggested effect, big hit during the fourth effect mode It is possible to execute the suggested effect) and the second suggested effect (for example, the in-game suggested effect by the first effect mode, the in-game suggested effect, the big hit suggested effect) with a low degree of specification of the set value set. It is described that it may be carried out, According to such composition, a stage effect can be heightened.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 4 of the fifth invention,
Using a plurality of types of decision data (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect determination table, a game suggestion effect determination decision table, and a big hit suggestion effect determination table) for determining the execution mode of the suggestion effect, the execution mode of the suggestion effect is Indication effect determining means to determine (for example, the part which performs step 121 IWS510, S512, S514, S705, S707, S709, S902, S904, S906 in CPU 120 for production control),
The suggestion effect determining means is
The execution mode of the suggestion effect is determined using the determination data corresponding to the setting value set among the plurality of types of determination data (for example, the CPU 120 for effect control is stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 122 Step 121 IWS 510, S 705 and S 902 are executed based on the set value)
If the set value information is not normally input, the execution mode of the suggestion effect is determined using the determination data according to the predetermined set value (for example, the set value “1”) (for example, the CPU 120 for effect control) Executes step 121 IWS 512, S707, S904 based on the set value "1")
It is described that it may be done, and according to such a configuration, an increase in data capacity can be prevented.

  In the present characteristic portion 121IW, "determining the execution mode of the suggestion effect" is a concept including determining whether to execute the suggestion effect and also determining the presentation mode of the suggestion effect. is there.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 5 of the fifth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means at least indicates a suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game indication effect or the like by a different ratio according to the set value being set in a period from when the setting value is changed to when the first variable display is performed). It is described that it may be possible to execute the initial appearance effect etc.). According to such a configuration, the state of the gaming machine before the start of the game is given an interest, and the game is started from the early time slot Can be motivated to enhance the fun of the game.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 6 of the fifth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means is set at least during the game until a predetermined period (for example, a special period (from the setting change until the variable display is executed 30 times)) after the setting value is changed. Suggested effects can be executed at different rates according to the set value being used (see, for example, FIGS. 20-6 (A) and (B) and FIGS. 20-30 (A) and (B))
It is described that it may be so. According to such a configuration, it is possible to give motivation to play a game in a predetermined period, and to enhance the game interest.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 7 of the fifth invention,
The suggested rendering execution means can execute the suggested rendering at different rates according to the set value that has been set (see, for example, FIGS. 20-30 (A), (B), etc.),
It is described that notification means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step S121 IWS 516) may be further provided which can notify information on the executed suggested effect, according to such a configuration. The suggestion effect executed in the past can be confirmed, and the game interest can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 8 of the fifth invention,
The suggested rendering execution means can execute the suggested rendering at different rates according to the set value being set (see, eg, FIGS. 20-34 (A), (B), etc.),
A predetermined effect (for example, a feature effect or the like in which the big hit suggestion effect is hard to be recognized when executed in parallel with the big hit suggestion effect). Predetermined effect execution means capable of executing light guide effect, error display, etc.);
Limiting means for limiting the execution of the predetermined effect when the suggested effect is executed (for example, when the big hit during the suggested effect is executed, the execution of the feature effect is limited. See FIG. 20-34 (D)) It is described that it may be further provided with the above-mentioned configuration. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 9 of the fifth invention,
The setting suggestion execution means can execute the setting suggestion at different rates according to the set value being set (see, eg, FIGS. 20-34 (A), (B), etc.)
A predetermined notification means capable of executing a predetermined notification according to an aspect in which the setting suggestion becomes difficult to recognize when the setting suggestion is executed in parallel (for example, the big hit suggestion effect is recognized when executed in parallel with the big hit suggestion effect) It is described that it may be possible to further provide a character feature effect, a light guide plate effect, an error display, etc. which becomes difficult, and according to such a configuration, a decrease in interest can be prevented.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 10 of the fifth invention,
A predetermined control period (for example, a fanfare period, an interval period, or the like during a big hit game) in the advantageous state differs depending on the set value set (for example, see FIG. 20-5).
It is described that it may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the irritability from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 11 of the fifth invention,
The predetermined control period (for example, fluctuation time) regarding the variable display differs depending on the set value set (for example, see FIG. 20-7).
It is described that it may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the irritability from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 12 of the fifth invention,
And a restricting member capable of restricting the operation on the operation unit (for example, a security cover 121IW500A / security cover 121IW500B / security cover 121IW500C).
When the opening and closing body is closed, the restricting member maintains the restricted state in which the operation on the operation unit is restricted, and when the opening and closing body is opened, the restricted state can be released (for example, the frame 121IW003 for game machine is closed) In the state in which the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is opened while the security cover 121IW500A maintains the restricted state in which the operation on the operation unit including the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 is restricted. Is released from the restricted state by the security cover 121 IW 500 A, and becomes an allowable state in which the operation of the setting key 121 IW 051 and the setting switch 121 IW 052 is permitted. 48)
It is described that it may be done, and according to such a configuration, security is improved.

Further, a sixth invention shown below is also included in the present characterizing portion 121IW. That is, in the related art, a pachinko configured to be able to set any of the setting values among a plurality of setting values based on the setting operation and configured to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the setting values being set. As a gaming machine, for example, there is one described in JP-A-2010-200902. In JP 2010-200902 A, a change stop command (a set value specification command) corresponding to a set value before and after change is transmitted from the main control board to the effect control board, and before and after change obtained by the change stop command It is described that display by three types of effect patterns corresponding to three types of characters of giraffe, elephant, and lion is performed based on the value. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a possibility that an erroneous suggestion effect will be executed when the setting value information (setting value specification command) is not normal. In the gaming machine configured to be able to execute control of the advantageous state based on the set value being set, there is a possibility that the interest for the game may be reduced. Therefore, as the gaming machine of the means 1 of the sixth aspect of the invention for solving the problem, when focusing on the problem,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (eg, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player,
Setting means (for example, steps in the game control microcomputer 100) which can be set to any setting value among a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value "1" to setting value "3") based on setting operation 121 IWS 029),
Game control means capable of executing control of the advantageous state based on the set value set (for example, a portion for executing steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100);
Information output means capable of outputting setting value information (for example, setting value command) capable of specifying which setting value is set (for example, a portion for executing step 121 IWS031, S108 in the game control microcomputer 100) ,
Based on the set value information output from the information output means, suggestive effect execution means (for example, for effect control) that can execute suggested effects (for example, pre-game suggested effects, in-game suggested effects, big hit suggested effects) And a step of executing steps 121 IWS 509 to S 515, S 704 to S 709, and S 901 to S 906 in the CPU 120,
The suggestion effect execution means restricts the execution of the indication effect when the set value information output from the information output means is not normal (for example, the effect control CPU 120 performs the process of N in step S121, step S708). N, at S905 N, does not execute pre-game suggestion effects, in-game suggestion effects, big hit suggestion effects)
According to this feature, in the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value set, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest for the game. be able to.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 2 of the sixth invention,
The information output means can output the set value information at a plurality of timings (for example, by executing step 121 IWS 031, S 108, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits the set value command at the time of power on and at the start of fluctuation) Do)
It is described that it may be possible, and according to such a configuration, even if the setting value information can not be input properly at a certain timing, the setting value information can be normally input at the next timing. It is possible to prevent the decline in

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 3 of the sixth invention,
Suggested effect execution means, as a suggested effect, the first suggested effect with a high degree of specification of the set value that has been set (for example, suggested play during the game according to the third effect mode or during the game suggested effect, big hit during the fourth effect mode It is possible to execute the suggested effect) and the second suggested effect (for example, the in-game suggested effect by the first effect mode, the in-game suggested effect, the big hit suggested effect) with a low degree of specification of the set value set. It is described that it may be carried out, According to such composition, a stage effect can be heightened.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 4 of the sixth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means at least indicates a suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game indication effect or the like by a different ratio according to the set value being set in a period from when the setting value is changed to when the first variable display is performed). It is described that it may be possible to execute the initial appearance effect etc.). According to such a configuration, the state of the gaming machine before the start of the game is given an interest, and the game is started from the early time slot Can be motivated to enhance the fun of the game.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 5 of the sixth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means is set at least during the game until a predetermined period (for example, a special period (from the setting change until the variable display is executed 30 times)) after the setting value is changed. Suggested effects can be executed at different rates according to the set value being used (see, for example, FIGS. 20-6 (A) and (B) and FIGS. 20-30 (A) and (B))
It is described that it may be so. According to such a configuration, it is possible to give motivation to play a game in a predetermined period, and to enhance the game interest.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 6 of the sixth invention,
The suggested rendering execution means can execute the suggested rendering at different rates according to the set value that has been set (see, for example, FIGS. 20-30 (A), (B), etc.),
It is described that notification means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step S121 IWS 516) may be further provided which can notify information on the executed suggested effect, according to such a configuration. The suggestion effect executed in the past can be confirmed, and the game interest can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 7 of the sixth invention,
The suggested rendering execution means can execute the suggested rendering at different rates according to the set value being set (see, eg, FIGS. 20-34 (A), (B), etc.),
A predetermined effect (for example, a feature effect or the like in which the big hit suggestion effect is hard to be recognized when executed in parallel with the big hit suggestion effect). Predetermined effect execution means capable of executing light guide effect, error display, etc.);
Limiting means for limiting the execution of the predetermined effect when the suggested effect is executed (for example, when the big hit during the suggested effect is executed, the execution of the feature effect is limited. See FIG. 20-34 (D)) It is described that it may be further provided with the above-mentioned configuration. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 8 of the sixth invention,
The setting suggestion execution means can execute the setting suggestion at different rates according to the set value being set (see, eg, FIGS. 20-34 (A), (B), etc.)
A predetermined notification means capable of executing a predetermined notification according to an aspect in which the setting suggestion becomes difficult to recognize when the setting suggestion is executed in parallel (for example, the big hit suggestion effect is recognized when executed in parallel with the big hit suggestion effect) It is described that it may be possible to further provide a character feature effect, a light guide plate effect, an error display, etc. which becomes difficult, and according to such a configuration, a decrease in interest can be prevented.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 9 of the sixth invention,
A predetermined control period (for example, a fanfare period, an interval period, or the like during a big hit game) in the advantageous state differs depending on the set value set (for example, see FIG. 20-5).
It is described that it may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the irritability from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 10 of the sixth invention,
The predetermined control period (for example, fluctuation time) regarding the variable display differs depending on the set value set (for example, see FIG. 20-7).
It is described that it may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the irritability from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 11 of the sixth invention,
And a restricting member capable of restricting the operation on the operation unit (for example, a security cover 121IW500A / security cover 121IW500B / security cover 121IW500C).
When the opening and closing body is closed, the restricting member maintains the restricted state in which the operation on the operation unit is restricted, and when the opening and closing body is opened, the restricted state can be released (for example, the frame 121IW003 for game machine is closed) In the state in which the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is opened while the security cover 121IW500A maintains the restricted state in which the operation on the operation unit including the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 is restricted. Is released from the restricted state by the security cover 121 IW 500 A, and becomes an allowable state in which the operation of the setting key 121 IW 051 and the setting switch 121 IW 052 is permitted. 48)
It is described that it may be done, and according to such a configuration, security is improved.

In addition, a seventh invention shown below is also included in the present characterizing portion 121IW. That is, in the related art, a pachinko configured to be able to set any of the setting values among a plurality of setting values based on the setting operation and configured to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the setting values being set. As a gaming machine, for example, there is one described in JP-A-2010-200902. In JP 2010-200902 A, a change stop command (a set value specification command) corresponding to a set value before and after change is transmitted from the main control board to the effect control board, and before and after change obtained by the change stop command It is described that display by three types of effect patterns corresponding to three types of characters of giraffe, elephant, and lion is performed based on the value. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a possibility that an erroneous suggestion effect will be executed when the setting value information (setting value specification command) is not normal. In the gaming machine configured to be able to execute control of the advantageous state based on the set value being set, there is a possibility that the interest for the game may be reduced. Therefore, as the gaming machine of the means 1 of the seventh invention for solving the problem, when focusing on the problem,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (eg, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player,
Setting means (for example, steps in the game control microcomputer 100) which can be set to any setting value among a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value "1" to setting value "3") based on setting operation 121 IWS 029),
Game control means capable of executing control of the advantageous state based on the set value set (for example, a portion for executing steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100);
Information output means capable of outputting setting value information (for example, setting value command) capable of specifying which setting value is set (for example, a portion for executing step 121 IWS031, S108 in the game control microcomputer 100) ,
Based on the set value information output from the information output means, suggestive effect execution means (for example, for effect control) that can execute suggested effects (for example, pre-game suggested effects, in-game suggested effects, big hit suggested effects) And a step of executing steps 121 IWS 509 to S 515, S 704 to S 709, and S 901 to S 906 in the CPU 120,
The suggestion effect executing means is
The 1st indication effect (for example, the indication before the game with the 3rd effect aspect and the indication during the game with the 3rd effect aspect and the big hit indication with the 4th effect aspect) and the 2nd indication effect (for example, the game with the 1st appearance aspect) as the indication effect It is possible to execute pre-suggestion production, suggestion production during game, big hit suggestion production)),
When the set value information output from the information output unit is not normal, the second suggested effect can be executed as the suggested effect without executing the first suggested effect as the suggested effect (for example, The effect control CPU 120 executes the steps 121IWS514, S709, and S906, and does not execute the in-game indication effect in the third effect mode, the in-game indication effect, or the big hit indication effect in the fourth effect mode.
According to this feature, in the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value set, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest for the game. be able to.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 2 of the seventh invention,
The information output means can output the set value information at a plurality of timings (for example, by executing step 121 IWS 031, S 108, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits the set value command at the time of power on and at the start of fluctuation) Do)
It is described that it may be possible, and according to such a configuration, even if the setting value information can not be input properly at a certain timing, the setting value information can be normally input at the next timing. It is possible to prevent the decline in

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 3 of the seventh invention,
Suggested effect execution means, as a suggested effect, the first suggested effect with a high degree of specification of the set value that has been set (for example, suggested play during the game according to the third effect mode or during the game suggested effect, big hit during the fourth effect mode It is possible to execute the suggested effect) and the second suggested effect (for example, the in-game suggested effect by the first effect mode, the in-game suggested effect, the big hit suggested effect) with a low degree of specification of the set value set. It is described that it may be carried out, According to such composition, a stage effect can be heightened.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 4 of the seventh invention,
Using a plurality of types of decision data (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect determination table, a game suggestion effect determination decision table, and a big hit suggestion effect determination table) for determining the execution mode of the suggestion effect, the execution mode of the suggestion effect is Indication effect determining means to determine (for example, the part which performs step 121 IWS510, S512, S514, S705, S707, S709, S902, S904, S906 in CPU 120 for production control),
The suggestion effect determining means is
The execution mode of the suggestion effect is determined using the determination data corresponding to the setting value set among the plurality of types of determination data (for example, the CPU 120 for effect control is stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 122 Step 121 IWS 510, S 705 and S 902 are executed based on the set value)
When the setting value information is not properly input, dedicated determination data (for example, a game indication suggestion determination table for presentation mode C, a suggestion indication determination table during game, a big hit indication suggestion determination table) is used. The execution mode of the suggestion effect is determined (for example, the effect control CPU 120 uses the pre-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C, the in-game suggestion effect determination table, and the big hit suggestion effect determination table, step 121 IWS 514 , S709, S906)
It is described that it may be made to carry out, According to such composition, a fall of interest to a game can be prevented.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 5 of the seventh invention,
The suggestion effect execution means at least indicates a suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game indication effect or the like by a different ratio according to the set value being set in a period from when the setting value is changed to when the first variable display is performed). It is described that it may be possible to execute the initial appearance effect etc.). According to such a configuration, the state of the gaming machine before the start of the game is given an interest, and the game is started from the early time slot Can be motivated to enhance the fun of the game.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 6 of the seventh invention,
The suggestion effect execution means is set at least during the game until a predetermined period (for example, a special period (from the setting change until the variable display is executed 30 times)) after the setting value is changed. Suggested effects can be executed at different rates according to the set value being used (see, for example, FIGS. 20-6 (A) and (B) and FIGS. 20-30 (A) and (B))
It is described that it may be so. According to such a configuration, it is possible to give motivation to play a game in a predetermined period, and to enhance the game interest.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 7 of the seventh invention,
The suggested rendering execution means can execute the suggested rendering at different rates according to the set value that has been set (see, for example, FIGS. 20-30 (A), (B), etc.),
It is described that notification means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step S121 IWS 516) may be further provided which can notify information on the executed suggested effect, according to such a configuration. The suggestion effect executed in the past can be confirmed, and the game interest can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 8 of the seventh invention,
The suggested rendering execution means can execute the suggested rendering at different rates according to the set value being set (see, eg, FIGS. 20-34 (A), (B), etc.),
A predetermined effect (for example, a feature effect or the like in which the big hit suggestion effect is hard to be recognized when executed in parallel with the big hit suggestion effect). Predetermined effect execution means capable of executing light guide effect, error display, etc.);
Limiting means for limiting the execution of the predetermined effect when the suggested effect is executed (for example, when the big hit during the suggested effect is executed, the execution of the feature effect is limited. See FIG. 20-34 (D)) It is described that it may be further provided with the above-mentioned configuration. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 9 of the seventh invention,
The setting suggestion execution means can execute the setting suggestion at different rates according to the set value being set (see, eg, FIGS. 20-34 (A), (B), etc.)
A predetermined notification means capable of executing a predetermined notification according to an aspect in which the setting suggestion becomes difficult to recognize when the setting suggestion is executed in parallel (for example, the big hit suggestion effect is recognized when executed in parallel with the big hit suggestion effect) It is described that it may be possible to further provide a character feature effect, a light guide plate effect, an error display, etc. which becomes difficult, and according to such a configuration, a decrease in interest can be prevented.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 10 of the seventh invention,
A predetermined control period (for example, a fanfare period, an interval period, or the like during a big hit game) in the advantageous state differs depending on the set value set (for example, see FIG. 20-5).
It is described that it may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the irritability from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 11 of the seventh invention,
The predetermined control period (for example, fluctuation time) regarding the variable display differs depending on the set value set (for example, see FIG. 20-7).
It is described that it may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the irritability from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 12 of the seventh invention,
And a restricting member capable of restricting the operation on the operation unit (for example, a security cover 121IW500A / security cover 121IW500B / security cover 121IW500C).
When the opening and closing body is closed, the restricting member maintains the restricted state in which the operation on the operation unit is restricted, and when the opening and closing body is opened, the restricted state can be released (for example, the frame 121IW003 for game machine is closed) In the state in which the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is opened while the security cover 121IW500A maintains the restricted state in which the operation on the operation unit including the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 is restricted. Is released from the restricted state by the security cover 121 IW 500 A, and becomes an allowable state in which the operation of the setting key 121 IW 051 and the setting switch 121 IW 052 is permitted. 48)
It is described that it may be done, and according to such a configuration, security is improved.

  In the present characteristic portion 121IW, three types of effect modes A to C can be changed, and when the effect mode A is controlled, the setting value information is not properly input: In the case where the suggestion effect can be executed as being set to a predetermined setting value with a low degree of advantage for the player (configuration of the fifth invention described above) and the effect mode B is controlled, the setting value If the information is not correctly input, the configuration of the suggestion effect is limited (the configuration of the sixth invention described above), and if the effect mode C is controlled, the setting value information is normally input. If not, the first suggestion effect is not executed as the suggestion effect, and the second suggestion effect is configured to be executable as the suggestion effect (configuration of the seventh aspect of the present invention). It is not limited. For example, the control method according to any of the fifth to seventh inventions described above may be used to switch the suggestion effect according to the gaming state. In this case, for example, if the game state is the normal state, and if the set value information is not input normally, it is possible to execute the suggested effect assuming that the player is set to a predetermined set value with low degree of advantage. If the configuration (the configuration of the fifth invention described above) and the gaming state is the time saving state, the configuration of the configuration to limit the execution of the suggested effect when the set value information is not properly input (the configuration of the sixth invention described above If the game state is a definite variation state, and if the set value information is not properly input, the first suggestion effect is not executed as a suggestion effect, and the second suggestion effect can be executed as a suggestion effect ( The above configuration of the seventh invention) may be made.

  Further, it is not necessary to configure the suggestion effects to be executable by all the control methods of the fifth to seventh inventions described above, and it is possible to configure the suggestion effects by using only one of the control methods. It is also good.

  Further, in the present characteristic portion 121IW, when the setting value command itself can not be received due to a failure such as a drop or data corruption, the execution of the suggestion effect is controlled by the control method of the fifth invention to the seventh invention described above. Although the case where the effect is limited is shown, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, although the set value command is received, the suggested effect may be limited when the received set value command is inconsistent. In this case, for example, every time the setting value command is received, the setting value indicated by the setting value command received by the effect control means is stored, and then, when a new setting value command is received, a new setting value command is received. If the setting value indicated by the received setting value command does not match the previously stored setting value, it is determined that a mismatch has occurred, and execution of the suggested effect is performed by the control method of the fifth to seventh inventions. It may be controlled (restricting the suggested effect).

  Moreover, how to make the game different in each setting value "1"-"3" is not restricted to what was shown by this example. For example, in the case of odd numbered set values such as set value “1” and “3”, there are cases where it is easy to generate a continuous break (a big hit occurs continuously in a definite change state etc.) and a continuous break occurs. When the setting value is “2” or the even number setting value, the setting value is set so that the probability of occurrence of the connection is relatively constant and does not change. It may be configured to be able to execute a suggestive effect that suggests that it is an odd number. And, in this case, when the set value command can not be received normally, the control method according to the fifth to seventh inventions controls the execution of the suggested effect that suggests that the set value is an odd number. It may be configured to limit (reduce the suggestion effect).

  In addition, the control method of the execution of the suggestion effect when the set value command shown in the fifth invention to the seventh invention can not be normally received is the pre-reading zone effect as the suggestion effect, the in-reach suggestion effect, the presentation stage It is also possible to apply to the effect by the change of.

Further, an eighth invention shown below is also included in the present characterizing portion 121IW. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, the suggestion of the setting value is performed only during the variable display, and there is a problem that the interest can not be sufficiently enhanced. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of the means 1 of the eighth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of performing variable display and controlling it to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state etc.) advantageous to the player,
Setting means (eg, a portion where the CPU 103 executes setting change processing, etc.) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3);
Game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5, etc.) capable of executing control of the advantageous state based on the set value set,
A suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a setting suggestion effect) suggesting a set value being set;
The suggestion effect execution means at least indicates a suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game indication effect) according to a different ratio according to the set value set in a period from when the set value is changed to when the first variable display is performed. And an initial appearance effect etc. are described. According to this feature, the state of the gaming machine before the start of Can be motivated to enhance the fun of the game.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 2 of the eighth invention,
A gaming machine capable of executing variable display of identification information for effect (for example, a decorative pattern),
The suggestion effect execution means indicates a suggestion effect (for example, in which identification information for effect different according to the set value is displayed in a period from when the set value is changed to when the first variable display is performed. It is described that it may be possible to execute the display of the odd initial appearance number), and with such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the game interest.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 3 of the eighth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect according to the set value set when the power supply to the gaming machine is restored after the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped (for example, FIG. 20). As shown in -23 (A) and (B), the game pre-game suggestion effect determination table with different judgment values is used)
It is described that it may be made to carry out, According to such composition, game interest can be raised.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 4 of the eighth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means is capable of executing a specific indication effect (for example, an indication effect during a game, an indication effect during a big hit, etc.) that suggests a set value that has been set after variable display is started,
It is described that the specific suggestion effect may have a higher reliability for the set value suggested than the suggestion effect. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the fun of the game.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 5 of the eighth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using gaming media (for example, gaming balls),
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, general winning opening 50A ~ general winning opening 50D, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, first big winning opening, second big winning opening 712) Game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the winning ball process of S12);
And information display means (for example, display monitor 121IW029) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value giving means,
The information display means can display the set value that has been set (for example, a portion capable of displaying a ratio, a winning ratio, and a base on the display monitor 121IW029)
It is described that it may be done, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

Further, a ninth invention shown below is also included in the present characterizing portion 121IW. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that the motive to play a game can not be effectively given, and the interest can not be sufficiently enhanced. Therefore, as the gaming machine of the means 1 of the ninth aspect of the invention for solving the problem, when focusing on the problem,
A gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a big hit gaming state, etc.) advantageous to the player,
Setting means (eg, a portion where the CPU 103 executes setting change processing, etc.) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3);
Game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5, etc.) capable of executing control of the advantageous state based on the set value set,
A suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a setting suggestion effect) suggesting a set value being set;
The suggestion effect execution means sets at least during a game until a predetermined period (for example, a special period (after the setting change until the variable display is executed 30 times)) after the setting value is changed Suggested effects can be executed at different rates according to the set value being used (see, for example, FIGS. 20-6 (A) and (B) and FIGS. 20-30 (A) and (B))
According to this feature, it is possible to give motivation to play a game in a predetermined period, and to enhance the fun of playing a game.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 2 of the ninth invention,
A gaming machine capable of performing variable display and controlling in an advantageous state for the player,
Variable display pattern determination means for determining a variable display pattern;
And a variable display execution unit that executes variable display based on the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination unit,
The variable display pattern determination means determines one of a plurality of variable display patterns at different rates depending on when the setting value is changed and when it is not changed (for example, as shown in FIG. B) see),
It is described that the variable display execution means may execute variable display using a common background image when the set value is changed and when it is not changed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the game interest.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 3 of the ninth invention,
Variable display pattern determination means for determining a variable display pattern;
And a variable display execution unit that executes variable display based on the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination unit,
The variable display pattern determination means determines one of a plurality of variable display patterns according to different proportions when the set value is set to the first set value and set to the second set value by the setting means. (For example, refer to FIG. 20-6 (A), (B), etc.),
The variable display execution means can execute variable display using a common background image when the setting value is set to the first setting value and when the setting value is set to the second setting value. It is described that it may be possible to enhance the fun of the game according to such a configuration.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 4 of the ninth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means is that a predetermined condition is satisfied within a predetermined period (for example, becoming a big hit in a specific period, that the number of times of execution of reach effect or pseudo-series effect has reached a predetermined number, specific super reach effect In addition, it is possible to execute the suggestion effect (for example, when the big hit occurs within a specific period, it is possible to perform the big hit suggestion effect) based on the fact that the advance effect is executed, etc. Fig. 20-34 ( See A) and (B))
It is described that it may be made to carry out, According to such composition, game interest can be raised.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 5 of the ninth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using gaming media (for example, gaming balls),
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, general winning opening 50A ~ general winning opening 50D, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, first big winning opening, second big winning opening 712) Game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the winning ball process of S12);
And information display means (for example, display monitor 121IW029) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value giving means,
The information display means can display the set value that has been set (for example, a portion capable of displaying a ratio, a winning ratio, and a base on the display monitor 121IW029)
It is described that it may be done, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

Further, the present characterizing portion 121IW also includes a tenth invention shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that it is not possible to confirm the suggested effects executed in the past, and the interest can not be sufficiently enhanced. Therefore, as the gaming machine of the means 1 of the tenth invention of solving the problem, when focusing on the problem,
A gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a big hit gaming state, etc.) advantageous to the player,
Setting means (eg, a portion where the CPU 103 executes setting change processing, etc.) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3);
Game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5, etc.) capable of executing control of the advantageous state based on the set value set,
A suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a setting suggestion effect) suggesting a set value being set;
The suggestion effect executing means can execute the suggestion effect at different rates according to the set value being set (see, for example, FIGS. 20-30 (A), (B), etc.),
According to this feature, the gaming machine is further provided with notifying means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step S121 IWS 516) capable of notifying information on the executed suggested effect. The suggestion effect executed in the past can be confirmed, and the game interest can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 2 of the tenth invention,
The notification means can notify the number of times the suggested effect has been executed (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step S121IWS 516)
It is described that it may be made to carry out, According to such composition, game interest can be raised.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 3 of the tenth invention,
The notification means can notify the content of the executed suggested effect (for example, a portion where the CPU 120 for effect control executes step S121 IWS 516)
It is described that it may be made to carry out, According to such composition, game interest can be raised.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 4 of the tenth invention,
The notification means can notify information related to the suggested effect performed while waiting for a customer whose variable display is not being executed (for example, a part where the CPU 120 for effect control executes step S121 IWS 516)
It is described that it may be made to carry out, According to such composition, game interest can be raised.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 5 of the tenth invention,
An information generation unit configured to generate information (for example, execution history information) related to the suggested rendering performed;
An image generation unit configured to generate a specific image (for example, a two-dimensional code including execution history information) from which the information can be read by an imaging device;
It is described that a display means (for example, the image display device 5) for displaying the specific image in a mode in which the specific image can be picked up by the image pickup device may be provided. Can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 6 of the tenth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using gaming media (for example, gaming balls),
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, general winning opening 50A ~ general winning opening 50D, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, first big winning opening, second big winning opening 712) Game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the winning ball process of S12);
And information display means (for example, display monitor 121IW029) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value giving means,
The information display means can display the set value that has been set (for example, a portion capable of displaying a ratio, a winning ratio, and a base on the display monitor 121IW029)
It is described that it may be done, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

In addition, an eleventh invention shown below is also included in the characterizing portion 121IW. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that if the setting suggestion effect is hard to be recognized due to other effects, there is a possibility that the interest may be reduced. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the eleventh invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a big hit gaming state, etc.) advantageous to the player,
Setting means (eg, a portion where the CPU 103 executes setting change processing, etc.) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3);
Game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5, etc.) capable of executing control of the advantageous state based on the set value set,
A suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a setting suggestion effect) suggesting a set value being set;
The suggestive effect executing means can execute the suggestive effect at different rates according to the set value being set (see, for example, FIGS. 20-34 (A), (B), etc.)
A predetermined effect (for example, a feature effect or the like in which the big hit suggestion effect is hard to be recognized when executed in parallel with the big hit suggestion effect). Predetermined effect execution means capable of executing light guide effect, error display, etc.);
When the suggestion effect is executed, it further comprises a restriction means for restricting the execution of the predetermined effect (for example, when the jackpot suggestion effect is executed, the execution of the feature effect is restricted. Fig. 20-34 (Refer to (D))
A gaming machine having the feature described therein is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 2 of the eleventh invention,
The limiting means changes the execution timing of at least one of the suggested effect and the predetermined effect when the execution timings of the suggested effect and the predetermined effect overlap (for example, one of them is performed during the fanfare period and the other is the ending) Change to run in period)
It is described that it may be made to carry out, According to such composition, a fall of interest can be prevented.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 3 of the eleventh invention,
The limiting means prohibits the execution of the predetermined effect when the suggestion effect is executed (for example, when the big hit suggestion effect is executed, the execution of the feature effect is prohibited. See FIG. 20-34 (D). )
It is described that it may be made to carry out, According to such composition, a fall of interest can be prevented.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 4 of the eleventh invention,
When the suggestion effect is executed, the limiting means executes the predetermined effect according to the effect mode in which the suggestion effect is not easily recognized (for example, the movable member 121IW 101 is operated in the operation mode different from the normal mode Control not to stop at the position where it overlaps with the speech image by the effect))
It is described that it may be made to carry out, According to such composition, a fall of interest can be prevented.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 5 of the eleventh invention,
The suggested effect and the predetermined effect (for example, a fanfare effect for displaying a predetermined image on the image display device 5) include display on one display means (for example, the image display device 5),
It is described that the one display means may display the display relating to the suggestive effect prior to the display relating to the predetermined effect. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the deterioration of interest. Can.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 6 of the eleventh invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using gaming media (for example, gaming balls),
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, general winning opening 50A ~ general winning opening 50D, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, first big winning opening, second big winning opening 712) Game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the winning ball process of S12);
And information display means (for example, display monitor 121IW029) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value giving means,
The information display means can display the set value that has been set (for example, a portion capable of displaying a ratio, a winning ratio, and a base on the display monitor 121IW029)
It is described that it may be done, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

Moreover, a twelfth invention shown below is also included in the present characterizing portion 121IW. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that there is a possibility that the interest is reduced by the execution of setting suggestion effects which are not preferable to the player. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of the means 1 of the twelfth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a big hit gaming state, etc.) advantageous to the player,
Setting means (eg, a portion where the CPU 103 executes setting change processing, etc.) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3);
Game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5, etc.) capable of executing control of the advantageous state based on the set value set,
A setting suggestion execution unit capable of executing a setting suggestion (for example, setting suggestion effect) that suggests a set value being set;
The setting suggestion execution means can execute setting suggestion at a rate different according to the set value being set (see, for example, FIGS. 20-34 (A), (B), etc.)
A predetermined notification means capable of executing a predetermined notification according to an aspect in which the setting suggestion becomes difficult to recognize when the setting suggestion is executed in parallel (for example, the big hit suggestion effect is recognized when executed in parallel with the big hit suggestion effect) The gaming machine has been described which is further provided with a character feature effect, a light guide plate effect, an error indication, etc., which become difficult, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 2 of the twelfth invention,
It is described that the predetermined notification means may execute predetermined notification (for example, feature effect) for operating the movable member (for example, the movable member 121IW101), according to such a configuration. , Can enhance the rendering effect.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 3 of the twelfth invention,
A light guide plate (for example, a light guide plate 121IW103) having translucency capable of transmitting light;
A light emitter provided so as to be capable of receiving light from the end face of the light guide plate;
The light guide plate is provided with a reflecting portion that reflects light incident from the end face of the light guide plate to the inside of the light guide plate by the light emitter and emits the light to the front of the gaming machine.
The predetermined informing means is capable of executing predetermined informing (for example, light guide plate effect) for emitting light from the reflection portion provided on the light guide plate to the front surface of the gaming machine by causing the light emitter to emit light. It is described that it is also good, and according to such composition, a stage effect can be heightened.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 4 of the twelfth invention,
It is described that the predetermined notification means may be capable of executing predetermined notification for displaying an error. According to such a configuration, an error can be appropriately notified.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 5 of the twelfth invention,
The setting suggestion execution means is a first setting suggestion that suggests that the setting is set to the first set value (for example, a jackpot suggestion effect in the first effect mode. See FIGS. 20-34 (A) and (B)) The second setting suggestion that suggests that the player is set to a second setting value that is higher for the player than the first setting value (for example, during a big hit during the third effect mode, as shown in FIG. 20-34 ( A) and (B)) can be performed,
When the first setting indication is executed, the predetermined notification means can execute the predetermined notification at a higher rate than when the second setting indication is performed (see, for example, FIG. 20-34 (E)).
It is described that it may be made to carry out, According to such composition, a fall of interest can be prevented.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 6 of the twelfth invention,
Setting suggestion setting means capable of setting an execution ratio of setting suggestion (for example, setting screen is displayed after power on, operation means such as operation means such as push button 31B, switches provided inside the gaming machine (management Can be operated by the person in charge) to change the settings related to the setting indication effect)
It is described that it may be made to carry out, According to such composition, a fall of interest can be prevented.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 7 of the twelfth invention,
A gaming machine that performs variable display of identification information,
A variable display device capable of variably displaying identification information by rotating a variable display member (for example, a drum-like or belt-like movable body) on which the identification information is disposed;
The variable display device performs a specific operation in variable display of the first identification information after the setting value is changed,
It is described that the predetermined notification means may execute the predetermined notification at a high rate in the variable display of the first identification information after the setting value is changed. According to such a configuration, It is possible to prevent the decline in interest.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 8 of the twelfth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using gaming media (for example, gaming balls),
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, general winning opening 50A ~ general winning opening 50D, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, first big winning opening, second big winning opening 712) Game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the winning ball process of S12);
And information display means (for example, display monitor 121IW029) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value giving means,
The information display means can display the set value that has been set (for example, a portion capable of displaying a ratio, a winning ratio, and a base on the display monitor 121IW029)
It is described that it may be done, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

In addition, a thirteenth invention shown below is also included in the characterizing portion 121IW. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that the gambling property may become too high when the setting of the degree of advantage is high. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of the means 1 of the thirteenth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a big hit gaming state, etc.) advantageous to the player,
Setting means (eg, a portion where the CPU 103 executes setting change processing, etc.) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3);
Game control means capable of executing control of the advantageous state based on the set value set (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5);
The predetermined control period (for example, a fanfare period or interval period during a big hit game, an ending period, etc.) in the advantageous state differs depending on the set value set (for example, see FIG. 20-5).
A gaming machine having the feature described therein is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the irritability from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 2 of the thirteenth invention,
The fanfare control period in the advantageous state differs depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 20-5 (B)).
It is described that it may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the irritability from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 3 of the thirteenth invention,
The interval control period in the advantageous state differs depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 20-5 (B)).
It is described that it may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the irritability from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 4 of the thirteenth invention,
The ending control period in the advantageous state differs depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 20-5 (B)).
It is described that it may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the irritability from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 5 of the thirteenth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a gaming value,
Game value giving means for giving a game value based on the establishment of the specific condition;
In the setting means, the first set value (for example, the set value 3) and the size of the game value provided by the game value giving means more than the first set value corresponds to the size of the game value used for the game It can be set to a second set value (for example, set value 1) where the proportion occupied becomes high,
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state is longer when the second set value is set than when it is set as the first set value (for example, FIGS. 20-5A and 20B). reference)
It is described that it may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the irritability from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 6 of the thirteenth invention,
It is described that it may be possible to provide a suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a big hit suggestion effect) in a predetermined control period in an advantageous state, which is indicative of a set value being set. According to such a configuration, the interest of the predetermined control period in the advantageous state can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 7 of the thirteenth invention,
Equipped with presentation execution means capable of executing presentation,
The effect executing means is capable of executing common effects (for example, common fanfare effect, interval effect, ending effect, etc.) regardless of the set value set in a predetermined control period in an advantageous state. It is described that it may be described that, according to such a configuration, the interest of the predetermined control period in the advantageous state can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 8 of the thirteenth invention,
It is described that the predetermined control period in the advantageous state may be determined in advance in accordance with the set value that has been set, and with such a configuration, the irritability becomes too high. Can be prevented.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 9 of the thirteenth invention,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to a plurality of advantageous states,
The game control means can be controlled to any one of a plurality of types of advantageous states (for example, jackpot types A to C) at different rates based on the set value set,
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state differs depending on the type of the advantageous state (see, for example, FIG. 20-5 (B)).
It is described that it may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the irritability from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 10 of the thirteenth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using gaming media (for example, gaming balls),
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, general winning opening 50A ~ general winning opening 50D, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, first big winning opening, second big winning opening 712) Game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the winning ball process of S12);
And information display means (for example, display monitor 121IW029) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value giving means,
The information display means can display the set value that has been set (for example, a portion capable of displaying a ratio, a winning ratio, and a base on the display monitor 121IW029)
It is described that it may be done, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

In addition, the characterizing portion 121IW also includes a fourteenth invention shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that the gambling property may become too high when the setting of the degree of advantage is high. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of the means 1 of the fourteenth invention of solving the problem,
A gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a big hit gaming state, etc.) advantageous to the player,
Setting means (eg, a portion where the CPU 103 executes setting change processing, etc.) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3);
Game control means capable of executing control of the advantageous state based on the set value set (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5);
The predetermined control period (for example, fluctuation time) regarding the variable display differs depending on the set value set (for example, see FIG. 20-7).
A gaming machine having the feature described therein is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the irritability from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 2 of the fourteenth invention,
The variable display period differs depending on the set value set (for example, see FIG. 20-7).
It is described that it may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the irritability from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 3 of the fourteenth invention,
It is described that the period in which the display result of the variable display is displayed may be changed according to the set value set, and with such a configuration, the irritability becomes too high. Can be prevented.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 4 of the fourteenth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a gaming value,
Game value giving means for giving a game value based on the establishment of the specific condition;
In the setting means, the first set value (for example, the set value 3) and the size of the game value provided by the game value giving means more than the first set value corresponds to the size of the game value used for the game It can be set to a second set value (for example, set value 1) where the proportion occupied becomes high,
The predetermined control period for the variable display is longer when the second set value is set than when the first set value is set (for example, see FIG. 20-7).
It is described that it may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the irritability from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 5 of the fourteenth invention,
It is described that the predetermined control period for the variable display may be determined in advance according to the set value that has been set, and with such a configuration, the irritability becomes too high. Can be prevented.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 6 of the fourteenth invention,
Variable display pattern determination means for determining a variable display pattern;
And a variable display execution unit that executes variable display based on the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination unit,
The variable display pattern determination means determines any one of a plurality of variable display patterns having different variable display periods according to different proportions according to the set value set (for example, see FIG. 20-7).
It is described that it may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the irritability from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 7 of the fourteenth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using gaming media (for example, gaming balls),
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, general winning opening 50A ~ general winning opening 50D, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, first big winning opening, second big winning opening 712) Game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the winning ball process of S12);
And information display means (for example, display monitor 121IW029) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value giving means,
The information display means can display the set value that has been set (for example, a portion capable of displaying a ratio, a winning ratio, and a base on the display monitor 121IW029)
It is described that it may be done, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

  The configuration indicated by the characteristic portion 121IW can be appropriately combined with the configuration indicated by the other characteristic portions such as the characteristic portion 31AK to constitute a gaming machine. For example, when performing the pre-reading zone effect and the in-reach indication effect shown in the feature part 121IW, the effect by changing the effect stage, the pre-game indication effect, the in-game indication effect, and the big hit indication effect, the pre-reading zone effect and reach Suggestion zone effect and reach during suggestion in the same manner as feature part 31AK when a predetermined period has passed from the start of suggestion effect production, change of production stage, production effect suggestion before game, suggestion effect during game production, suggestion effect during big hit A title corresponding to a presentation, a presentation by changing the presentation stage, a suggestion before a game, a suggestion during a game, a suggestion during a big hit, and a suggestion during a big hit may be configured to be able to be notified.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... pachinko gaming machine 2 ... gaming board 3 ... gaming machine frame 4A, 4B ... special symbol display device 5 ... image display device 6A ... winning ball device 6B ... variable winning ball device 7 ... special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker 9 ... game effect lamp 10 ... general winning opening 11 ... main board 12 ... effect control board 13 ... voice control board 14 ... lamp control board 15 ... relay board 20 ... normal symbol display 21 ... gate switch 22A, 22B ... start opening Switch 23 ... count switch 30 ... hitting operation handle 31A ... stick controller 31 B ... push button 32 ... movable body 100 ... microcomputer for game control 101, 121 ... ROM
102, 122 ... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124 ... random number circuit 105, 125 ... I / O
120 ... CPU for effect control
123 ... Display control unit

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
Suggestion effect execution means capable of executing suggestion effect suggesting control to the advantageous state;
Title notification means capable of notifying a title corresponding to the suggested effect;
The gaming machine, wherein the title notification means can notify a title corresponding to the suggested effect when a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the suggested effect.